Hydromax

Windows Version 16

User Manual

© Formation Design Systems Pty Ltd 1984 - 2011

License and Copyright
Hydromax Program © 1985-2011 Formation Design Systems Pty Ltd Hydromax is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. The license for use is granted to the purchaser by Formation Design Systems as a single user license and does not permit the program to be used on more than one machine at one time. Copying of the program to other media is permitted for back-up purposes as long as all copies remain in the possession of the purchaser. Hydromax User Manual © 2011 Formation Design Systems Pty Ltd All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, without the written permission of Formation Design Systems. Formation Design Systems reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and to make changes to the contents without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Neither Formation Design Systems, nor the author of this program and documentation are liable or responsible to the purchaser or user for loss or damage caused, or alleged to be caused, directly or indirectly by the software and its attendant documentation, including (but not limited to) interruption on service, loss of business, or anticipatory profits. No Formation Design Systems‟ distributor, agent, or employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.

iii

Contents

Contents
License and Copyright...................................................................................................... iii Contents .............................................................................................................................. v About this Manual .............................................................................................................. 1 Chapter 1 Introduction........................................................................................................ 3 Input Model .............................................................................................................. 3 Analysis Types ......................................................................................................... 4 Analysis Settings ...................................................................................................... 4 Environment Options ............................................................................................... 4 Stability Criteria ....................................................................................................... 5 Output....................................................................................................................... 5 Chapter 2 Quickstart ........................................................................................................... 7 Upright Hydrostatics Quickstart .............................................................................. 7 Large Angle Stability Quickstart ............................................................................. 8 Equilibrium Condition Quickstart ............................................................................ 9 Specified Condition Quickstart .............................................................................. 10 KN Values Quickstart ............................................................................................ 10 Limiting KG Quickstart ......................................................................................... 11 Floodable Length Quickstart .................................................................................. 12 Longitudinal Strength Quickstart ........................................................................... 13 Tank Calibrations Quickstart ................................................................................. 13 MARPOL oil outflow Quickstart ........................................................................... 14 Probabilistic Damage Quickstart............................................................................ 15 Chapter 3 Using Hydromax .............................................................................................. 16 Getting Started ....................................................................................................... 16 Installing Hydromax .................................................................................... 16 Starting Hydromax ....................................................................................... 16 Hydromax Model ................................................................................................... 17 Preparing a Design in Maxsurf .................................................................... 18 Opening a New Design ................................................................................ 21 Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File ............................................... 22 Effect of Zero Point change ......................................................................... 24 Updating the Hydromax Model ................................................................... 26 Hydromax Sections Forming ....................................................................... 27 Checking the Hydromax model ................................................................... 30 Setting Initial Conditions ............................................................................. 34 Working with Loadcases.............................................................................. 38 Modelling Compartments ............................................................................ 51 Tank sections ............................................................................................... 61 Forming Compartments ............................................................................... 62 Compartment Types ..................................................................................... 68 Sounding Pipes ............................................................................................ 69 Damage Case Definition .............................................................................. 71 Key Points (e.g. Down Flooding Points) ..................................................... 74 Margin Line Points ...................................................................................... 76 Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments ................................. 76 Floodable Length Bulkheads ....................................................................... 77 Stability Criteria........................................................................................... 77 Analysis Types ....................................................................................................... 77 Upright Hydrostatics .................................................................................... 78 Large Angle Stability ................................................................................... 80 Equilibrium Analysis ................................................................................... 87
v

Contents

Specified Conditions .................................................................................... 90 KN Values Analysis..................................................................................... 92 Limiting KG................................................................................................. 95 Limiting KG for damage conditions with initially loaded tanks.................. 98 Floodable Length ....................................................................................... 102 Longitudinal Strength ................................................................................ 105 Tank Calibrations ....................................................................................... 107 MARPOL Oil Outflow .............................................................................. 112 Probabilistic Damage ................................................................................. 115 Starting and Stopping Analyses ................................................................. 137 Batch Analysis ........................................................................................... 138 Analysis Settings .................................................................................................. 141 Heel ............................................................................................................ 141 Trim ........................................................................................................... 142 Draft ........................................................................................................... 144 Displacement ............................................................................................. 145 Specified Conditions .................................................................................. 145 Permeability ............................................................................................... 145 Tolerances .................................................................................................. 146 Analysis Environment Options ............................................................................ 147 Fluids Analysis Methods ........................................................................... 148 Density of Fluids........................................................................................ 150 Waveform .................................................................................................. 152 Grounding .................................................................................................. 153 Stability Criteria......................................................................................... 154 Damage ...................................................................................................... 154 Analysis Output.................................................................................................... 155 Reporting ................................................................................................... 155 Copying & Printing.................................................................................... 157 Select View from Analysis Data ................................................................ 159 Saving the Hydromax Design .................................................................... 159 Exporting ................................................................................................... 160 Chapter 4 Stability Criteria ............................................................................................. 163 Criteria Concepts.................................................................................................. 163 Criteria List Overview ............................................................................... 163 Types of criteria ......................................................................................... 166 Criteria Procedures ............................................................................................... 167 Starting the Criteria dialog ......................................................................... 167 Resizing the Criteria dialog ....................................................................... 168 Working with Criteria ................................................................................ 168 Editing Criteria .......................................................................................... 170 Working with Criteria Libraries................................................................. 172 Criteria Results ..................................................................................................... 174 Criteria Results Table ................................................................................ 174 Report and Batch Processing ..................................................................... 176 Nomenclature ....................................................................................................... 176 Definitions of GZ curve features ............................................................... 176 Glossary ..................................................................................................... 179 Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference ..................................................................................... 181 Windows .............................................................................................................. 181 Assembly View and Property Sheet .......................................................... 181 View Window ............................................................................................ 181 Loadcase Window...................................................................................... 183

vi

.................................................................................................................. 224 Integration of wetted surface area ................ 195 Edge VIsibility Toolbar ................ 222 Trim angle ................ 191 Toolbars .............................................................................................................................. 196 Render Toolbar ............................................................. 222 LCG and LCB ...................................................................................................................... 214 Nomenclature ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 202 Case Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 212 Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194 Analysis Toolbar .......................................................................................................................................... 219 Midship and Max Area Sections ............................................................................................................ 195 Visibility Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 194 Edit Toolbar ................... 220 Block Coefficient ......................... 197 Edit Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................. 212 Help Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 200 View Menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 196 Design Grid Toolbar .............................................................. 196 Report Toolbar ............................... 204 Analysis Menu ..... 221 Section Area Coefficient ..................... 197 File Menu ........... 196 View (extended) Toolbar ................................................................................................................................. 223 Immersion ...................................................................................................................................................... 184 Results Window .......................... 194 View Toolbar ................... 228 vii ................................................................................... 223 Maximum deck inclination ............. 214 Measurement Reference Frames .. 194 File Toolbar................................................................................ 228 Parent Calculations........ 196 Menus .......................................................................................................................... 185 Graph Window............................. 216 Coefficient parameters .................... 224 Appendix B: Criteria file format ........................................................................................................................................... 224 Potential for errors in hydrostatic calculations ................................................................................. 221 Prismatic Coefficient .......... 204 Display Menu.Contents Damage Window ............................................................................. 211 Window Menu .......................................................................... 188 Report Window ... 223 RM at 1 deg.................................................. 218 Draft ............................................... 221 Waterplane Area Coefficient ....................... 207 Data Menu..... 183 Input Window ......................................... 195 Design Grid Toolbar . 217 Beam ......................................................................................................................................... 196 Extra Buttons ToolbarToolbar ................................................................................................. 223 MTc or MTi ................................................................................... 195 Window Toolbar .......................................................................................................................... 214 Definition and calculation of form parameters .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 216 Length .................................... 226 Appendix C: Criteria Help..................................................................................................................................

......................................... 297 IMO HSC Code MSC.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 309 Testing of Implementation ........... 307 File Extension Reference Table .......................................................................................... 295 Capsizing moment ....75(69)..........................................................................................................................................................................................Contents Selecting a calculation in a criterion ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 291 Stand alone heeling arm combined criteria .......................................... 290 Specific stand alone heeling arm criteria ........................................................................................................................... 295 Dynamic stability criteria .......................................................... 309 Quality Assurance ...................... 309 Structured Programming ............................................ 260 Heeling arm criteria ........... 304 Appendix E: Reference Tables .................................................... 228 Angle calculators .................................................................................... 229 Parent Heeling Arms .....................................................................................................................................................................749(18) amended to MSC........ combined criteria...... 295 Heeling arms for specific criteria ............................................................................. 242 GZ Curve Criteria (non-heeling arm) ............................... 312 Index ........................................................ 292 Appendix D: Specific Criteria .......... 312 Testing of Upgrades ................................... 307 Analysis settings reference table ..................................................................................... 299 USL code (Australia) ......... 232 Heeling Arm Definition ...... 297 IMO Code on Intact Stability A................................................................................... 240 Parent Stability Criteria ..................................................................................................................................................... 232 Parent Heeling Moments ........................... 264 Multiple heeling arm criteria ........................................................................................................................................... 312 Version Control...............36(63) ...................................................................................................................... 228 GM calculators... 291 Stand alone heeling arm criteria ................................................................................................................................................Note on unit conversion ........................................................................... 309 Quality Principles ............................................................................ 275 Heeling arm.......... 301 ISO 12217-1:2002(E) ........................... 313 viii ...... .................. 302 ISO 12217: Small craft – stability and buoyancy assessment and categorisation. 243 Heeling arm criteria (xRef) ..................................... 242 Criteria at Equilibrium ................. 309 Verification of Algorithms .................................................. 281 Derived heeling arm criteria ............................................... 308 Appendix F: Quality Assurance ......................................................... 312 But we're not Perfect .................. 285 Other combined criteria ............ 312 Beta Testing ..........................

Chapter 1 Introduction Contains a description of Hydromax functionality and its interface to Maxsurf Chapter 2 Quickstart Gives a quick walk through the analysis tools available in Hydromax. If you are unfamiliar with Microsoft Windows® interface. Page 1 . Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Gives details of Hydromax' windows and each of Hydromax' menu commands. This will introduce you to commonly used terms and the basic techniques for using any computer program. please read the owner's manual supplied with your computer.About this Manual About this Manual This manual describes how to use Hydromax to perform hydrostatic and stability analyses on your Maxsurf design. Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Explains how to use Hydromax' powerful floatation and hydrostatic analysis routines to best advantage. Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Gives details of the stability criteria that may be evaluated with Hydromax.

.

Loadgroups may also be created and cross referenced into loadcases. Hydromax is designed in a logical manner. centre of gravity and free surface moment. This allows visual checking of compartments and shows the orientation of the vessel during analysis. eliminating the need for time-consuming digitising of drawings or hand typing of offsets. A number of environmental setting options and modifiers add further analysis capabilities to Hydromax. margin lines and section modulus. which makes it easy to use. Other input consists of: tank sounding pipes. This includes: compartments and key points such as downflooding points and margin line. key points. Tanks and compartments can be flooded for the purpose of calculating the effects of damage. This direct transfer preserves the three-dimensional accuracy of the Maxsurf model. Tanks can be defined and calibrated for capacity. the model can be displayed using hull contour lines. Page 3 . Hydromax adds extra information to the Maxsurf surface model. The following steps are followed when performing an analysis: Input model Analysis type selection Analysis settings Environment options Criteria specification and selection Run analysis Output Hydromax operates in the same graphical environment as Maxsurf. Hydromax‟ analysis tools enable a wide range of hydrostatic and stability characteristics to be determined for your Maxsurf design. such as downflooding points. immersion and embarkation points. stability and longitudinal strength program specifically designed to work with Maxsurf. rendering or transparent rendering. Input Model Maxsurf design files may be opened directly into Hydromax.Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction Hydromax is a hydrostatics. The loadcase allows static weights and tankfillings to be specified and calculates the corresponding weights and centres of gravity as well as the total weight and centre of gravity of the vessel under the specified loading condition. A number of loadcases can be created.

The following analysis settings are available: Heel Trim Draft Displacement Permeability Specified condition The analysis settings are specified prior to running the analysis. or a range of heel angles for a large angle stability analysis. The analysis settings for each analysis type are explained in detail in the analysis synopsis below. For example: the upright hydrostatics analysis simply requires a range of drafts. For example. Environment Options Environmental options are modifiers that may be applied to the model or its environment that will affect the results of the all the hydrostatic analysis types. Settings that are not relevant to the selected analysis type are greyed out in the Analysis menu. Analysis Settings The analysis settings describe the condition of the vessel to be tested. whereas the longitudinal strength analysis requires a detailed load distribution. a range of drafts in the case of upright hydrostatics.Chapter 1 Introduction Analysis Types Hydromax contains the following analysis tools: Upright hydrostatics Large angle stability Equilibrium analysis Specified Condition analysis KN values and cross curves of stability Limiting KG analysis Floodable Length analysis Longitudinal Strength analysis Tank Calibrations MARPOL oil outflow Probabilistic damage (Hydromax Ultimate only) Although common analysis settings are used where possible. different analyses may require different settings. Page 4 .

Hydromax has a generic set of parent criteria from which virtually any stability criterion can be customized. Output Views of the hull are shown for each stage of the analysis. The criteria checks are summarised in tables listing the status (pass/fail) of each criterion as well as the margin. continue reading Chapter 2 Quickstart. or as graphs of the various parameters across the full range of calculation. different environmental options may be applied to the Hydromax: Type of Fluid Simulation Density (of fluids) Wave form Grounding Intact and Damage condition Stability Criteria Hydromax has the capability to calculate compliance with a wide range of stability criteria. The criterion settings and intermediate calculation data may also be displayed if required. All results are accumulated in the Report window (which can be saved. These criteria are either derived from the properties of the stability curve calculated from a Large Angle Stability analysis or from the vessel‟s orientation and stability properties calculated from an Equilibrium analysis. copied and printed). In addition. complete with immersed sectional areas and actual waterlines. For a brief overview of the different analysis that Hydromax has available. gravity and buoyancy are also displayed.Chapter 1 Introduction Depending on the analysis being performed. Hydromax has an extensive range of stability criteria to determine compliance with a wide range of international stability regulations. The centres of flotation. Limiting KG and Floodable length analyses also use stability criteria. Page 5 . Results are stored and may be reviewed at any time. either in tabular form. Heeled and trimmed hullforms and water plane shapes may be printed. or output directly to a Word document.

.

trim is fixed at a user defined value and draft is varied in fixed steps. Upright Hydrostatics Quickstart For Upright Hydrostatics. For each analysis type. large angle stability.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Chapter 2 Quickstart This chapter will briefly describe each analysis type and its output. settings and environment options in more detail. Displacement and centre of buoyancy and other hydrostatic data are calculated during the analysis. Page 7 . limiting KG and Floodable length analysis. heel is fixed at zero heel. a list of the required settings as well as the available environment options is given. Hydromax contains the following analysis types Upright Hydrostatics Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Condition Specified Condition KN Values Limiting KG Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength Tank Calibrations MARPOL Oil Outflow Probabilistic Damage Each analysis has different settings that may be applied Heel Trim Draft Displacement Specified condition Permeability Loadcase Tank and compartment definition Hydromax offers different environment options that may be applied to the analyses Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Grounding Damage Hydromax offers an extensive range of stability criteria that are applicable to equilibrium. The Analysis types section describes each of the analysis types.

including upright GM. Page 8 . curves of form and sectional area at each draft are available.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Upright hydrostatics requirements Range of drafts to be analysed VCG (for calculation of some stability characteristics such as GMt and GMl only) Trim Upright hydrostatic options Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage) The results are tabulated and graphs of the hydrostatic data. For more detailed information please see: Upright Hydrostatics on page 78. the centre of gravity against the centre of buoyancy such that the trimming moment is zero. the horizontal distance between the centres of gravity and buoyancy. Large angle stability requirements Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Loadcase or loadgroup Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage) Large angle stability options Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage) Key points Margin line and deck edge Analysis of stability criteria The key output value is GZ (or righting lever). if the model is free-to-trim. curves for wind heeling and passenger crowding levers and the angle of the first downflooding point. A range of heel angles are specified and Hydromax calculates the righting lever and other hydrostatic data at each of these heel angles by balancing the loadcase displacement against the hull buoyancy and. A graph of these values at the various heel angles forms a GZ curve. Various other information is often overlaid on the GZ curve. These additional data depend on which (if any) stability criteria have been selected. displacement and centre of gravity are specified in the loadcase. Large Angle Stability Quickstart For the analysis of Large Angle Stability.

these results will also be reported in the criteria results table and they may lead to additional curves being displayed on the GZ curve. integrated from upright) Variations of other hydrostatic and form parameters may be plotted against heel angle. Note that some of these graphs have parameters that may be adjusted in the Data Format dialog If large angle stability criteria have been selected for analysis. as is the freeboard to any defined key points. Downflooding angles for any key points. to calculate the displacement and the location of the centre of gravity. Page 9 . heel and trim that satisfy equilibrium and reports the equilibrium hydrostatics and a cross sectional areas curve.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax A number of other graphs may be selected from the pull-down list in the graph window. Equilibrium Condition Quickstart Equilibrium Analysis uses the Loadcase. If a wave form has been specified there will be a number of columns. Hydromax iterates to find the draft. margin line and deck edge. Any equilibrium criteria will also be evaluated and their results reported. margin line and deck edge will also be computed and tabulated. For more detailed information please see: Large Angle Stability on page 80. Equilibrium analysis requirements Loadcase or loadgroup Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage) Compartment definition and damage case (in case of damage) Equilibrium analysis options Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Grounding Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage) Key points Margin line and deck edge Analysis of equilibrium criteria Equilibrium analysis result table lists the hydrostatic properties of the model. The sectional area curve is also calculated. Maximum safe steady heel angle The sectional area curve at each of the heel angles tested may also be displayed. each column contains the results for a different position of the vessel in the wave as given by the wave phase value. Remember that you can access this data in tabular form by double clicking in the graph window: Dynamic stability curve (Area under GZ curve.

KN Values Analysis Requirements Page 10 .KG * sin(Heel) where GZ is the righting lever measured transversely between the Centre of Buoyancy and the Centre of Gravity. Specified Conditions options Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage) The output for the specified condition consists of a curve of cross sectional areas and hydrostatics of the vessel in the specified condition. They may be calculated for a number of displacements before the height of the centre of gravity is known. Specified Condition Quickstart In the specified condition each of the three degrees of freedom.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax For more detailed information please see: Equilibrium Analysis on page 87. The KN data may then be used to obtain the GZ curve for any centre of gravity height (KG) using the following formula: GZ = KN . Specified Condition Requirements Specified Conditions Input Dialog If fixed trim is specified. you may enter the trim or specify the forward and aft drafts (these are at the perpendiculars as specified in the Frame of Reference dialog). and KG is the distance from the baseline to the vessel's effective Vertical Centre of Gravity. can be set. KN Values Quickstart KN values or Cross Curves of Stability are useful for assessing the stability of a vessel if its VCG is unknown. for which the hydrostatic properties of the model are to be calculated. For more detailed information please see Specified Conditions on page 90.

Limiting KG Quickstart The Limiting KG analysis may be used to obtain the highest vertical position of the centre of gravity (maximum KG) for which the selected stability criteria are just passed. If the analysis is performed free-to-trim and an estimate of the VCG is known. Hydromax runs several Large Angle Stability analyses at different KGs. At each of the specified displacements. The selected stability criteria are evaluated.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Range of displacements to be analysed Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Estimate of VCG (provides more accurate result if free-to-trim) TCG (if required) KN Values Analysis Options Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage) Output is in the form of a table of KN values and a graph of Cross Curves of Stability. The computed KN results will then give a more accurate estimate of GZ for KG close to the estimated VCG since the effects of VCG on trim have been more accurately accounted for. this may be specified. For more detailed information please see KN Values Analysis on page 92. This may be done for a range of vessel displacements. Limiting KG Analysis Requirements Range of displacements to be analysed Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Stability criteria for which limiting KG is to be found TCG (if required) Limiting KG Analysis Options Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage) Laodcase (in case of initial loading of damaged tanks) Key points (if required for criteria) Margin line and deck edge (if required for criteria) Page 11 . the centre of gravity is increased until one of the criteria fails.

e. If the analysis is unable to converge for a certain displacement this will be noted and the next displacement tried. Only relevant criteria will be used. As well as the standard deck edge and margin line immersion criteria (one of which must be specified) the user can also add criteria for maximum trim angle and minimum required values of longitudinal and transverse metacentric height.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax A graph of maximum permissible GZ plotted against vessel displacement is produced as well as tabulated results indicating which stability criteria limited the VCG.to. only intact criteria will be evaluated. this may be done in the Batch Analysis mode. are very insensitive to VCG and may prevent the analysis converging. Floodable Lengths may be computed for a range of displacements. however at least one large angle stability criterion is required. For more detailed information see Limiting KG on page 95. if a damage case is chosen. i. If limiting curves are required for each of the stability criteria individually. The VCG is also required to ensure accurate balance of the CG against the CB at high angles of trim.trim to either initial trim or specified LCG) Floodable length criteria to be tested Margin line and deck edge (required for criteria) Floodable Length Analysis Options Fluid Densities Wave form Page 12 . In addition a range of permeabilities may be specified. such as angle of maximum GZ. Floodable Length Analysis Requirements Range of displacements to be analysed VCG Range of permeabilities to be analysed Trim (free. the LCG may be specified directly or calculated from a specified initial trim. if the intact condition is used. Floodable Length Quickstart This analysis mode is used to compute the maximum compartment lengths based on user-specified equilibrium criteria. A check will be made to ensure that any selected equilibrium criteria are passed. Some criteria. only damage criteria will be evaluated.

Hydromax uses its fluid simulation mode to calculate the actual position of the fluids in the tanks. Tank calibrations may be performed for a range of heel and trims. taking into account the vessel trim and heel. the shear force and bending moment on the vessel. Longitudinal Strength Analysis Requirements Loadcase (including distributed loads if required) Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage) Longitudinal Strength Analysis Options Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation is always used for Longitudinal Strength analysis Wave form Grounding Damage Compartment definition and damage case (in case of damage) Allowable shear and bending moment The longitudinal strength graph and tables contain all information on weight and buoyancy distribution. The results for a single condition are shown in the results table. the position of the fluid in the tank will be computed so that the fluid surface is parallel with the external seawater surface. Longitudinal Strength Quickstart Hydromax calculates the net load from the buoyancy and weight distribution of the model. The data is also presented graphically.e. The data is tabulated for each of the stations as defined in Maxsurf.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The output is in the form of tabulated Floodable Lengths for each displacement and permeability. Tabulated results may be customised using the Data Format dialog: Page 13 . Fluid densities and tank permeabilities can be varied arbitrarily. i. That data is then used to calculate the bending moment and shear force on the vessel. For more detailed information please see Floodable Length on page 102. graphs of allowable shear and bending moment are superimposed on the graph. soundings are measured from the bottom of the sounding pipe to the free surface. For more detailed information please see Longitudinal Strength on page 105. centre of gravity and free surface moment (FSM). Tank Calibrations Quickstart Tanks can be defined and calibrated for capacity. The condition to be viewed may be selected from the Results toolbar. Tank calibrations may be calculated for a range of trim and heel angles. If defined. Tank ullages are measured from the top of the sounding pipe to the free surface of the liquid within the tank along the sounding pipe and in a similar manner.

edit any values as required. MARPOL Oil Outflow Quickstart MARPOL probabilistic oil outflow calculation may be computed according to the following MARPOL regulations: Resolution MEPC. Regulation 23: Accidental oil outflow performance Seltect the Reolution and tanks to be included in the analysis in the MARPOL options (Analysis menu) dialog. volumes etc. The “Start Analysis” button will send the tabulated results to the Report.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Tank calibration analysis requirements Tank definitions Sounding pipe definition (if required) Sounding intervals for calibration levels Trim range Heel range Tank calibration analysis options Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation always selected Damage: Intact case always selected What to calibrate (Analysis | Calibration options) For each tank. is calculated. the resulting oil outflows will be calculated automatically. These results are presented in both tabular and graphical forms. Then in the MARPOL results data table. Regulation 12A: Oil fuel tank protection Resolution MEPC. a table of capacities.141(54). For more detailed information please see Tank Calibrations on page 107.117(52). Page 14 .

Probabilistic damage analysis requirements Loadcase definitions Tank and compartmentation definition Main probabilistic damage analysis parameters and criteria setup Subdivision definitions Heel angle range for GZ curve calculation Trim Probabilistic damage analysis options Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Key points Margin line and deck edge For more detailed information please see the Probabilistic Damage section on page 115.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax For more detailed information please see MARPOL Oil Outflow on page 112 Probabilistic Damage Quickstart Attained index using probabilistic damage analysis may be computed. Page 15 .

then follow the instructions on screen.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Chapter 3 Using Hydromax This chapter describes Getting Started Hydromax Model Analysis Types Analysis Settings Analysis Environment Options Analysis Output Getting Started This section contains everything you need to do to start using Hydromax Installing Hydromax Starting Hydromax Installing Hydromax Install Hydromax by inserting the CD and running the Setup program. doing this will reset all the preferences. You will be asked if you wish to clear the preferences. The following preferences are stored in the registry: Page 16 . Note: Before installing any program from the Maxsurf suite for the first time. Simply select Hydromax from the Maxsurf menu item under Programs in the Start menu. To clear the Hydromax preferences. please read the purchase letter (also referred to as installation manual). click OK. Windows Registry Certain preferences used by Hydromax are stored in the Windows registry. or you may simply want to revert back to the default configuration. start the program with the Shift key depressed. Hydromax should be accessible through the Start Menu. It is possible for this data to become corrupted. Starting Hydromax After installation.

All hydrostatic calculations use this. Hydromax Model This section describes how to open a Maxsurf model in Hydromax and provides some important information to ensure that your model is correctly interpreted by Hydromax. the next step is to check the Hydromax settings and initial analysis conditions. Check the density of seawater after resetting your preferences. these may be reset by holding down the shift key when activating them) Density of fluids Heel angles for large angle stability. It is recommended to save your customized densities with your project using the File | Save Densities As command. Preparing a Design in Maxsurf Opening a New Design Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File Updating the Hydromax Model Hydromax Sections Forming Checking the Hydromax model After checking the Hydromax model.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Colour and line thickness settings of contours and background Fonts Window size and location Size of resizing dialogs (alternatively. KN and Limiting KG analyses Permeabilities for floodable length analysis Location of files Units for data input and results output Convergence tolerance (Error values) Maximum number of loadcases Reporting preferences Note: The default density for the fluid labelled "Sea Water" is stored in the windows registry. Setting Initial Conditions Depending on the analysis performed. you may need to set up the following additional model data: Page 17 .

The frame of reference cannot be changed in Hydromax. By convention. In Hydromax you have the option of displaying longitudinal measurements such as LCB or LCF from the model zero point or amidships. the vessel‟s bow is on the right. A consistent zero point and frame of reference should be used for the model throughout the Maxsurf suite. The Frame of reference should not be changed in Hydromax. The frame of reference defines the fore and aft perpendiculars. This is done through the Data | Draft Marks dialog. Down Flooding Points) Margin Line Points Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments Stability Criteria Preparing a Design in Maxsurf There are several important checks that must be carried out in Maxsurf before opening a design in Hydromax: Setting the Zero Point Setting the Frame of Reference Surface Use Skin Thickness Outside Arrows Trimming Coherence of the Maxsurf surface model Setting the Zero Point Ensure that the zero point is correctly setup in Maxsurf. midships is automatically defined midway between the perpendiculars.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Working with Loadcases Modelling Compartments Forming Compartments Compartment Types Damage Case Definition Sounding Pipes Key Points (e. Page 18 . However it is possible to specify upto nine additional locations at which the drafts should be reported. The base line is the datum from which the drafts and KG are measured. in the profile and plan views. Setting the Frame of Reference It is vital that the Frame of Reference is correctly setup in Maxsurf before attempting to analyse the model in Hydromax. the baseline and the datum waterline. The perpendiculars define the longitudinal positions of the vessel‟s draft marks and cannot be coincident.g.

internal surfaces will be ignored in the forming of hydrostatic sections. Skin Thickness Hull Shell Internal Structure If skin thickness is to be used in hydrostatic calculations.e. To include skin thickness. To activate skin thickness in Hydromax ensure that the “Include Skin Thickness” option is selected when reading the file or calculating the hull sections. Skin thickness for hull surfaces will be treated so that the hull sections go to the outside of the plate whilst any tanks are trimmed to the inside of the plate. ensure that the thickness and projection direction have been specified for the hull shell surfaces. it is not included as part of the hull shell by Hydromax. the internal structure surface should be placed to model the inside of the tank if the tank wall has significant thickness. Note Tank boundaries made from internal structures surfaces do not have skin thickness. resulting in more accurate hydrostatics. Page 19 . Thickness can be specified differently for each hull surface. If a surface is defined as internal structure. i. Surface Use In Maxsurf you can choose between two types of surface use Hull Hull surfaces are used to define the watertight envelope of the hull. Internal structure Internal structure surfaces are used for all other surfaces (any surfaces which do not make up the watertight envelope) and also surfaces which are to be used in Hydromax to define the boundaries of tanks and compartments that have complex shapes.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note: Draft and Trim specification It should be remembered that the drafts specified for an analysis are the drafts at the perpendiculars (or amidships) and the trim specified (and reported) is the difference between the draft at the AP and draft at the FP. The following table describes the difference between each surface use in Hydromax: Included: Hydrostatic sections Selection of tank/compartment boundaries Skin thickness applied to the surface Verify that all surfaces that are to be used as tank/compartment boundaries are defined as Internal Structure.

you should have completely closed transverse sections or sections with at most one opening (e. Trimming Ensure that all surfaces are trimmed correctly. the deck). At any longitudinal position on the hull. Correct Section with no opening. Ensure that you have used the Outside Arrows command from the Maxsurf Display menu to define which direction points outwards (towards the seawater) for each surface.g. The surface direction may be flipped by clicking on the end of the arrow. Also see: Hydromax Sections Forming on page 27 Checking the Hydromax model on page 30 Coherence of the Maxsurf surface model Hydromax will generally have no problem correctly interpreting your design as long as the following requirements for the Maxsurf model are observed: Page 20 . Correct section with one opening: this section will be closed across the top.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Outside Arrows The surfaces‟ outside arrows define the orientation of the surfaces.

These will then be used for the Hydrostatics calculations. then select Open Design from the File menu. Use Trimmed Surfaces If the Maxsurf model has trimmed surfaces. the part of the keel that is inside the hull and the part of the hull that is inside the keel Do not have surfaces that cannot be closed in an unambiguous fashion.e. e. Hydromax will automatically look for compartment definition files when you are in a Compartment Definition window and a loadcase in a Loadcase window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Make sure that each surface touches its adjacent surfaces at its edge. Page 21 . any surface thickness specified in the Maxsurf Surface Properties dialog may be included. if any) is explained in Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File. The following dialog will appear: Calculate new Sections Choosing Calculate Sections will calculate the specified number of sections through the hull.g. i. To open a design for analysis. Include Plating Thickness At this stage. Choose a Maxsurf design file (. i. Also see: Checking the Hydromax model on page 30. The meaning of (ignore existing data. the Use Trimmed Surfaces item should be ticked. Opening a New Design File opening in Hydromax is window specific. Remember that the inner portions of each intersecting contour will be trimmed off Check surface use. internal structure surfaces are ignored when forming the hull sections in Hydromax Note: For groups internal structure surfaces that will be used to define tank (or compartment boundaries) the same requirements apply.e. a maximum of one gap in a transverse section through the hull.msd). trim away the excess regions of the surface. preferably by bonding the edges together Where surfaces intersect. ensure that the design view window is active.

Hydromax recognises this precision setting and will and set the Surface Precision button accordingly. a “Hydromax Design file” (. Therefore it is recommended not to change the precision setting when opening the Maxsurf design file in Hydromax. compartment definition.msd). usually at relatively small impact on the accuracy of the hydrostatics. Note: Maxsurf surface trimming information may vary for different precisions. For example. Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File After saving the Maxsurf design file for the first time in Hydromax.hmd) is created. Reducing the number of stations will speed up the analysis time but reduce the accuracy. Note: The accuracy of the results depends much more on the number of sections than the accuracy at which the sections are calculated. The Hydromax design file will consist of the hydrostatic sections and all input data such as loadcases. sounding pipes etc. To open an existing design. Surface Precision The Surface Precision options has two functions: Setting for calculating the hydrostatic sections Setting used to form new compartments or tanks. Hydromax also allows saving of all input and output files into individual files. The first option allows you to use the station grid created in Maxsurf. It also allows designs with significant longitudinal discontinuities in their sectional areas to have stations specified either side of the discontinuity. you may select how many stations should be used. key points. Reducing the precision of the sections can greatly improve performance. conversely increasing the number of stations will increase the analysis time but lead to higher accuracy results. there are two options: Page 22 . avoiding any errors inherent in the integration of evenly spaced stations. This is extremely useful for hulls that have features such as keels or bow thrusters that need to be accurately modelled and may need a locally denser station spacing to do so. by specifying one station 1mm aft of amidships and one station 1mm forward of amidships this discontinuity can be modelled very accurately. The upper limit for the number of stations is 200. if it was known that a design had a significant discontinuity in its sectional area curve at amidships. The precision at which the design was saved in Maxsurf is included in the Maxsurf design file (.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Stations When calculating stations.

damage cases. This means that changes to the hull shape in the Maxsurf Design file. Notes: 1) When selecting “Read existing data and sections (do not update geometry)” the Maxsurf surface information is not recalculated. the OSV.  Ensure “Read existing data and sections” is selected and click OK. Page 23 .msd file. i. For example: when opening OSV.e.msd.hmd file. See: Updating the Hydromax Model on page 26 for more information. compartment definitions. Hydromax will now open the . loadcases.hmd file from any Windows explorer window Use the Hydromax Open command form the file menu and select the .msd file.hmd file with the same name as the . are not automatically incorporated. The Calculate Sections dialog now has the option to read the sections from the file. it will look for a .hmd file was saved.hmd file is found.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Double click on the . You will load your existing sections. When Hydromax opens a . This contains hydrostatic sections information and all input information from last time the . key points etc.msd file An existing Hydromax design consists of a number of files with different file extensions. loadcases and compartment definitions etc.

please see: File Extension Reference Table on page 307.hmd file (as is done when you chose Save when the drawing window is top most). data is then created in Hydromax and that data all saved in the .hmd file will be overwritten and any existing data lost. loadcase. Etc. Page 24 . You will have to reload your individual loadcases and compartment definition files etc after you have selected this option and pressed OK. Effect of Zero Point change The description below relates to what happens in the following situation: A hull model is generated in Maxsurf Tank and load etc. For more information on file properties and extensions in Hydromax. where as the key points and margin line remained in the same position relative to the hull. the zero point has been moved (in Maxsurf) to the aft-perpendicular and the DWL. Original location of data as entered in Hydromax before zero point change in Maxsurf.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax 2) Calculate new sections (ignore existing data. the tanks and centre of gravity (from the loadcase) have remained in their same locations relative to the zero point. The two images from Hydromax 13 show this problem. data is automatically read from the . Hydromax 13 behaviour It may sometimes occur that the model zero point location is changed in Maxsurf after tank. The first image shows the model as initially defined in Hydromax with the zero point amidships and at the baseline. The model is closed in Hydromax The model is opened in Maxsurf and for some reason the location of the zero point is changed The model is reopened in Hydromax and the tank and load etc. Note that whilst the margin line and key points have remained in their same locations relative to the hull. data is defined in Hydromax. if any) means that Hydromax will recalculate the hull sections and ignore any data stored in the .hmd file.hmd file. Do not choose this option if you wish to keep the additional Hydromax data and you have not yet saved them as individual files as if the model is saved in Hydromax the . In the second image. In previous versions of Hydromax this could cause problems because the loadcase and tank data maintained their position relative to the zero point.

Hydromax now detects if the zero point has been modified in Maxsurf when the model is reopened in Hydromax. Note that this is only possible with Hydromax models that have been saved from the new version of Hydromax (because the new version of Hydromax now saves the zero point independently so that it can check for changes). Original location of data as entered in Hydromax before zero point change in Maxsurf. Selecting “yes” will maintain the position all the Hydromax data relative to the hull. Hydromax will display the following message: If the zero point is moved in Maxsurf. you will now be prompted. essentially just the zero point it moved. when loading a .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Effect of Zero point change in Maxsurf 13. Hydromax 14 behaviour To rectify this problem. Now.hmd file. This of course means that the numerical values of the various data are changed: Page 25 . if the zero point has changed.

select “Recalculate Hull sections” in the analysis menu after reloading the Maxsurf Design File with the “read existing data and sections from file” option selected. but their numerical values will remain the same: The example shown is quite extreme. will move relative to the hull. The “Recalculate Hull Sections” command recalculates Hull surfaces as well as Tank Boundary surfaces (Internal Structure surfaces in Maxsurf).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Click “yes” to maintain position of tanks. This function can also be used to include/exclude surface thickness or change the number of sections and to change use/not use trimmed surfaces without reloading the Maxsurf Design File. Thus the tanks and loads etc. it is more likely that this option would be selected if it was realised that the zero point for the tank plan were slightly different than the zero point of the lines plan and a small correction to the zero point was required. Selecting “no” will move all data other than the margin line with the zero point. Click “no” to maintain position relative to zero point. Updating the Hydromax Model To update the hydrostatic sections to the latest Maxsurf Design File. loads etc relative to the hull. Page 26 . Any tanks and loadcases will also be updated with this command.

Page 27 . compartment definition etc remain part of the Hydromax design file. the section must be made up of closed. contours cannot be contained wholly within another contour. “hydrostatic sections” or just “sections”. The same is true for groups of internal surfaces that have been selected to define a tank boundary.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note: Changes to the Maxsurf design are only recalculated after the new Maxsurf design has been re-loaded into Hydromax. In practice. however. having both a gap at the centreline as well as an open deck). Where a section consists of an open shell (e. it is necessary to: 1) save and close the model in Hydromax 2) save in Maxsurf 3) open in Hydromax. 4) use the “Recalculate Hull Sections” from the analysis menu. a hull surface with no deck).g. Hydromax will automatically form these sections. called “Hydromax sections”. Note: The golden rule is that for any longitudinal position. This is not an acceptable shape. Hydromax Sections Forming Hydromax works by applying trapezoidal integration to data calculated from a series of cross sections taken through the Maxsurf model surfaces.g. This section outlines the section forming process used in Hydromax and may be helpful when preparing a Maxsurf design for Hydromax. Hydromax deals only with sections that are completely closed. or can be unambiguously closed. This means that if the model is simultaneously being edited in Maxsurf and Hydromax. Hydromax will try to resolve any problems with the model definition in the manner outlined in the following sections. an ambiguity exists as to how the two line segments will be connected. (e. Whilst it is always preferable to give Hydromax a completely closed model with no ambiguities. Furthermore. non-intersecting (and non-self-intersecting) contours. Hydromax will automatically close the section with a straight line connecting the opening ends. using “Read existing data and sections” to make sure the loadcase. If. one opening is acceptable and this will be automatically closed with a straight line. the section is made up of two line segments.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax In the example above. bonded together or use compacted control points will not cause any problems when opened in Hydromax. Multiple surfaces that are trimmed correctly. Hydromax will form a closed section through multiple surfaces by linking the curve segments together. if either the top or bottom gap had been closed in Maxsurf the design would cease to be ambiguous. Page 28 .

g.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax A section through a multihull containing a single closed contour A section comprising two closed contours Hydromax will link curve segments together if they are only separated by a small amount. Ambiguous Sections (e. Hydromax will have difficulties distinguishing the intended main deck. Where surfaces intersect. bulwarks) A common example of ambiguous sections is a model with multiple decks. Hydromax closes the outside contour and trims remnants Page 29 . Hydromax will make an attempt to remove excess portions of the curve to form a single continuous contour. because there are too many dependencies in the program. decks. The user cannot change these tolerances. However this is not always possible so it is much better practice to trim the model correctly manually.

Checking the Hydromax model Before starting any analysis you should check whether Hydromax has been able to correctly interpret your design. These sections should be continuous with no gaps and no unexpected lines. In particular. the bulwark‟s volume has to be properly modelled in Maxsurf by modelling both the outside and the inside of the bulwark. Show Single Hull Section In the body plan view. This works the same as the Maxsurf body plan window and is an extremely powerful tool to validate your Hydromax model.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The example above has bulwarks. Show Single Hull Section Checking the Sectional Area Curve Using Rendering to Check the Model Note: Sections that are not formed correctly cause the majority of problems with Hydromax models. checking your sections after opening the design in Hydromax is strongly recommended. Page 30 . but this depends on the height of the bulwark relative to the rest of the section. To prevent ambiguities it is recommended to trim the bulwark in Maxsurf. you can step through the sections one-by-one to verify that they have been correctly calculated. the left and right arrow cursor keys will enable you to step through the sections one-by-one. Therefore. For more information see the Maxsurf manual. The following tools are available to validate the Hydromax model. Incorrect sections in the model will give incorrect results. generally these will be treated correctly by Hydromax and removed. If the bulwark‟s volume is expected to influence the hydrostatic calculations. You can then click in the inset box to view the sections. look closely at intersections between surfaces to make sure that Hydromax has interpreted the shape correctly. This is done by selecting Show Single Hull Section in Body Plan view from the Display menu.

This is not a foolproof method since it does not necessarily highlight problems in the non-immersed part of the hull. This Cross Sectional Area curve indicates there may be a problem with section forming from 12 m to 16 m.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Checking the Sectional Area Curve Another way of checking the Hydromax model is to perform a specified condition analysis at quite deep draft and look carefully at the sectional area curve in the graph window. Select Render from the Display menu whilst in the perspective view and turn on the sections: Page 31 . Using Rendering to Check the Model The model may also be rendered. which makes it easier to see if there are any areas of the model which have not been properly defined. If this displays any unexpected spikes or hollows Hydromax may not have correctly interpreted the hull shape.

This does not necessarily mean that the model is incorrect. As long as the sections are formed correctly. the model is correct. To do this go to the body plan view in Hydromax and select “Show Single Section”: Page 32 . you are interested in whether the sections are correct.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note: In rare instances incorrect rendering may occur. Further detailed checking of hull and tank/compartment sections When checking that your model is correct.

but turn on the visibility of all the tanks of interest (if there are few tanks. In the single section view. if there are many it may help to hide some and check a few at a time). leave the view as it is. then you can show all of them. only tank sections near the current hull section are shown: Page 33 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Then to check that the tanks are OK.

it is important that you set up the required initial conditions for the design. Hydromax uses the aft perpendicular and forward perpendicular together with the baseline and the zero point for all calculations and gives the results in the units specified in the display menu. Coordinate System Hydromax uses the Maxsurf coordinate system: Longitudinal Transverse Vertical View window Page 34 +ve forward +ve starboard +ve up View direction -ve aft -ve port -ve down .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Setting Initial Conditions All Hydromax calculations are performed in the frame of reference of the model. Note: Before you run any analysis using Hydromax.

you may specify upto nine additional locations at which the drafts should be reported. This should be done in Maxsurf and not in Hydromax. Frame of Reference and Zero Point It is essential that a frame of reference be specified. Difference between “Immersed depth” and “Draft” measurements Page 35 . Changing the zero point after you have started analysing the model in Hydromax is not recommended. should you require drafts to be calculated at other locations. Note: Changing the zero point in Maxsurf will not update the compartment definition. Draft and trim are measured on the forward and aft perpendiculars. Draft Marks Drafts are automatically calculated at the perpendiculars and amidships. bow to the right. Port side above the centreline (this the opposite direction to Maxsurf) From Starboard. loadcase and other input values. This is done through the Data | Draft Marks dialog. Drafts are always measured to the Baseline in the centre plane of the vessel. Immersed depth measurements are made perpendicualar to the free-surface. See: Setting the Zero Point and Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18. If these are not in the correct positions.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Body plan Plan Profile From the stern. looking fwd From above. some analysis results will be meaningless or may even fail to complete.

beam and sectional area to be used for calculation of these coefficients. Middle or fwd end of the actual waterline. neither of these values has changed and neither are affected by the user-defined draft locations. Fwd Perpendicular or from the Aft. Customising Coefficients In Hydromax you may choose between the length between perpendiculars and the waterline length for the calculation of Block. You may also select the draft. Drafts can only be defined when the vessel is rotated to the DWL (Display | Set vessel to DWL). i.e. You can also specify whether you want the forward (towards the bow) or the aft (towards the stern) to have a positive sign.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax User-defined Draft Marks Note that the Trim is still defined as the difference between the drafts at the perpendiculars and the Midship draft (used to define the range of immersions for the Upright Hydrostatics analysis) is the mean of the drafts at the perpendiculars. User-defined draft locations and new toolbar button Note: Draft and Trim specification It should be remembered that the drafts specified for an analysis are the drafts at the perpendiculars (or amidships) and the trim specified (and reported) is the difference between the draft at the AP and draft at the FP. Amidships location. Finally you can chose whether you want the LCB and LCF to be displayed as a length or as a percentage of the waterline or LPP length as specified in the Length for Coefficients. Prismatic and Waterplane Area Coefficients. The LCB and LCF can be displayed in the Results windows relative to the specified Zero Point. Page 36 . Aft Perpendicular.

criteria) and the angular units to be used for areas under GZ curves.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Data | Coefficients dialog Setting Units The units used may be specified using the Units command. The angular units for measuring heel and trim angles are always degrees. units for force and speed (used in wind heeling and heeling due to high-speed turn etc. may also be set. Units may be changed at any time. In addition to the length and weight (mass) units. Page 37 .

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Other Initial Conditions See: Fluids Analysis Methods on page 148 Density on page 150 Working with Loadcases Loadcases define the loading condition of the vessel. Loadcases automatically contain all the tanks defined in the Tank definition. Any changes to the loadgroup are then automatically incorporated into any loadcases that reference them. click on the update Loadcase button and ensure that the hull is at the DWL by selecting “Set vessel to DWL”: Page 38 . A loadgroup is included in a loadcase simply by specifying the loadgroup name in the “Item Name” column. Loadgroups are special loadcases that contain no tanks. These may be used to define groups of fixed weights (such as the steel weight or lightship weight) in a single location which may then be cross-referenced into a loadcase. Static weights that make up the vessel lightship are specified here as well as tank filling levels. The loadcase will normally update the column totals automatically as weights or tank loadings are changed. If the loadcase does not update. The exception to this is if tanks have not yet been formed or the vessel is still rotated from the result of an analysis. expressed as either a percentage of the full tank capacity or as a weight.

The default loadcase will contain a lightship entry and an entry for each tank (with a default filling of 50%).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The individual loads can be displayed graphically: Creating a new Loadcase File To create a load case. switch to the loadcase view by selecting Loadcase from the Loadcase sub-menu in the Window menu. A new load spreadsheet will be displayed in the Loadcase window. Then select “New Load Case” from the File menu or press Ctrl+N. Page 39 .

To do this. select the Loadcase you wish to use as a template Bring the loadcase you wish to use as a template to the front for example by clicking on the tab on the bottom  select File | New First. an existing loadcase may be used as a template when creating a new loadcase. you will be asked for a new Loadcase name after which the following dialog appears: Page 40 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The tabs in the bottom of the window can be used to skip through the different loadcases in the design.  In the loadcase window. Create New Loadcases based on Template To avoid rework.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax A new loadcase will appear in one of the blank (…) loadcase tabs. Loading a Saved Loadcase You can load a saved loadcase into your loadcase window by:  Select an empty tab in the loadcase window that you wish to load the loadcase into Empty tab. or add more loadcases using the Case | Max. The next time you use the File | Save Loadcase command you will be asked to confirm the loadcase file name. Naming and Saving a Loadcase A loadcase can be given any name by saving it to a separate file where the loadcase filename will be used as the loadcase name and displayed on the tab in the loadcase window. you should either increase the maximum number of loadcases (see below). If there are no blank tabs left. changes made in the template are NOT automatically changed in the loadcase derived from it. Note The template is only used during the creation of the loadcase. Number of Loadcases command. Alternatively.  Select File | Open Load Case Page 41 . or close an existing loadcase. If there are no empty tabs. you will either have to close an existing loadcase. Once a loadcase has been created from a template loadcase.  Select Edit Loadcase from the Case menu  Changing the name in the Loadcase Properties dialog.

For convenience of use. you will only need to set this once to the maximum number of loadcases you are ever likely to use. You can repeat this process for as many loads as you wish. This is used to calculate the total weight of that item. click and drag so that all of the loading rows that you wish to delete are selected. The weight of each item should be entered in the next column. Each loadcase can be selected and used for analysis. effectively allowing you as many loadcases as you require. Page 42 . you could specify the quantity and unit weight. For example: if the item was “crew” with a weight per unit. If you wish to delete several loads simultaneously. In most cases. you will receive a warning and the file will not be loaded. a sensible number is recommended. Each may be saved and loaded independently. and choose Delete Load from the Edit menu (or highlight the complete row by clicking the grey cell to the left of the row and press the Delete key).hml file you wish to open. Closing a Loadcase   Select the tab of the loadcase you wish to close in the Loadcase window Select File | Close Load Case Adding and Deleting Loads To add an extra load to the loadcase. and the total weight of crew would be automatically calculated. Number of Loadcases” from the Case menu.  Select Add Load from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+A. for example "Lightship". You must restart Hydromax for this change to take effect. and press the Tab key to go to the next column in the table (or simply click directly in the cell you wish to edit). You must increase the maximum number of allowable loadcases and restart Hydromax before you can load the design. Note: When loading a design that has more loadcases than the maximum you have currently set in Hydromax. Setting the Maximum Number of Loadcases The maximum number of loadcases (up to twenty-five) that can be loaded in Hydromax at any one time is set by selecting “Max.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax  Select the . A new load will be inserted into the table above the currently selected row. then select Delete Load. For each item in the list you can specify a quantity. You may then enter the maximum number of load cases you require. If you want to remove a load from the table. Editing Loads Click on the cell containing the load name and type in a name for this load. simply click anywhere in the row you want to remove.

subtotals and subsubtotals. you may have to use Analysis | Update Loadcase ( button) to update the subtotals and subsubtotals. you may also sort selected items by name. Note: Levers. press enter and the total LCG will be automatically re-calculated and displayed in the bottom row of the table. Hydromax does this automatically prior to running an analysis. heading or sub-total lines in the table. After you type in this number. To ensure data consistency. The CG position will also be shown and updated in the View windows if Large Angle Stability. Adding Component or Heading Lines Components or headings can be included in a load case by preceding the text with a period (. Loadcase Formatting Hydromax allows you to improve the presentation of the Load Case window by adding blank. You may move selected items and tanks up and down in the loadcase. Insert row | Delete row | Sort rows | Move row(s) up | Move row(s) down Sort selected columns After moving loads.) character. Tab to the next column and enter the horizontal lever for the item. Longitudinal Strength or Equilibrium analysis are selected. as with all other measurements in Hydromax. If for some reason you wish to have an upward (negative) load. Page 43 . but opposite sign loads to the vessel in the loadcase. Adding Blank Lines A blank line can be added into the load case by placing a dollar ($). Loadcase Sorting A number of tools are available for controlling the order in which items and tanks occur in the loadcase. you can do so by entering a negative quantity – this can be useful if you want to apply a pure moment to the model by applying equal magnitude. apostrophe („) or full-stop(. fluid type (for tanks) etc.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The weight must always be positive. are measured from the Zero Point.) character in the Item Name field.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Adding Totals or Subtotals A subtotal can be displayed for several loads within a load case. tanks may be displayed in the same colour as the fluid they contain (As defined in Analysis | Fluids dialog). Sub-subtotals must start with the text “subsubtotal”.  View | Colours and lines menu when Loadcase window is frontmost Loadcase format It is possible to select which columns are displayed in the loadcase window. then the quantity and unit mass items will be included. The unit mass is the sum of all the masses of the full tanks and the quantity is the sum of the masses divided by the sum of the full tank masses. Grouping Similar Tanks Use the move items UP or Down commands in the Edit menu to adjust the row order in the loadcase. Sub-subtotals Sub-sub-totals may also be inserted. alternatively. When tanks are grouped by fluid type this can be useful for calculating the total tank capacity for that fluid type. Quantity and Unit mass for sub total rows If a sub total includes only tanks. Loadcase Colour Formatting Different colours can be defined for fixed mass items and tanks. To do this the item name field must commence with the word „total‟ or „subtotal‟. Use the Display | Data Format dialog: Page 44 .

Page 45 . the fore and aft limits define the longitudinal extents of the load. If the longitudinal arm is changed in the Loadcase window. For an evenly distributed load. Longitudinally Distributed Loads Distributed loads can be entered in the Loadcase window in the aft limit and forward limit cells. Arm” column defines the longitudinal position of the centre of the load. Moment columns (mass * lever) can be displayed if desired. This can be useful for vessels such as product carriers which may have cargos of different types of fluids with different densities. the centre of gravity should be midway between the forward and aft limits.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The Relative density and Fluid Type which allow you to override the default tank densities as defined for each tank in the Compartment Definition window. The aft limit and forward limit columns only appear when Longitudinal Strength analysis is selected and the distributed loads will only have an effect on the results in this analysis mode. the forward and aft limits will be moved by the same amount. The “Long.

they will be automatically included in the loadcases (but not in Loadgroups which do not contain tanks). Trapezium shaped distributed load. Red = Green divided within middle 1/3 of centre. but within the middle third 1/3 of the centre. at these extrema. Red = green and divided in the centre. the load distribution becomes triangular.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Evenly distributed loads. Note: Since the load is distributed as a trapezium. the centre of gravity should lie within the middle third between the forward and aft limits of the load. Tank Loads When you create tanks using the compartment definition. Page 46 . For trapezium shaped distributed loads the centre of gravity is not midway between the boundaries. Tanks will be automatically treated as distributed loads for the longitudinal strength calculations.

To prevent the problems of recursively including the same loadcase and also prevent tanks from being included more than once. question marks may be shown in the loadcase momentarily while the tank‟s new volumetric properties are being calculated. Also see: Update Loadcase on page 206 Loadcase cross-referencing. It also means that this lightship mass distribution would only need to be defined and edited in one location instead of in each loadcase. A Loadcase can reference any number of Loadgroups A Loadgroup is referenced in a Loadcase by typing the name of the Loadgroup to be referenced in the Item column You can factor the referenced Loadgroup by changing the value of the Quantity column in the Loadcase. select Update Loadcase from the Analysis menu or toolbar. Tank level can be given as either a percentage of full capacity. Updating tank values in the loadcase Irrespective of whether you have updated the values in the Loadcase Condition. The tank Unit Mass is the tanks mass at 100% filling. This is useful if you wish to define a detailed lightship mass distribution but do not want to have it displayed in full in each loadcase. Loadgroups It is possible to cross-reference one loadcase from another.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Tanks have a quantity value. To update the loadcase for changes in tank loads. a sounding or a weight. expressed as a percentage of the full capacity and a weight column. the Loadcase will be automatically updated as the first step of any analysis using the Loadcase information. When a tank is changed in the Compartment definition table. we have defined the following rules: A special type of Loadcase called a Loadgroup has been defined. A Loadgroup does not contain tanks Only a Loadgroup can be referenced Only a Loadcase can reference a Loadgroup. For the example above this means that the lightship mass distribution would be defined as a Loadgroup and then this Loadgroup could be referenced in any number of loadcases. volume. Loadgroups may be analysed in the same way as Loadcases – but remember the tanks are implicitly empty in a Loadgroup. The Loadcase properties dialog (Case menu) is used to define a loadcase as a Loadgroup: Page 47 .

The Lightship load group can then be cross-referenced into any loadcase Page 48 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax This lightship Loadgroup contains the lightship mass distribution along the ship.

By default use tank defined densities: Page 49 . for instance. Loadcase density override It is now possible to override the default tank fluid densities as defined in the Compartment definition window. This allows you to load the same tanks with different fluids in different Loadcases – as might be the case for a product carrier.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The referenced Loadgroup is automatically calculated and the appropriate values included in the Loadcase: Note: Loadgroup naming The cross-referencing of loadgroups in a loadcase is case insensitive.

Page 50 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Type in a valid (>0.0) specific gravity and it will override the tank value: Type in any string that doesn‟t begin with an “L” for the fluid and it will revert back to the tank value: Type in some thing that begins with an “L” and it will revert back to the “Private” density of the loadcase item.

htk)  Select the Compartment Definition table by clicking on the Compartment Definition tab at the bottom of the Input window. Select New Compartment Definition from the File menu  Page 51 . divide by the total displacement to obtain the VCG correction and adjust the VCG accordingly to obtain the corrected fluid VCG. this section contains a number of important sections that the user should be aware off when modelling tanks: Number of Sections in Tanks on page 67 Tank and Compartment Permeability on page 59 Creating a Compartment definition file (.3 for the calculation of the free surface moment. This method approximates the movement of fluid due to heeling and is based on the fluid shift in a 50% full rectangular. the Loadcase will sum the free surface moments. box-shaped-tank. at every step of the analysis. Fluid simulation If the Fluid simulation option is selected in the analysis menu. The options available are Maximum Hydromax will use the maximum free surface moment of the tank in upright condition for all fluid levels. For other shapes and fillings of tanks it will not correctly approximate the free surface moment. User specified A user specified value is used for all levels and heel angles. Modelling Compartments This section will describe in detail how to model different types of tanks and compartments. Actual Hydromax uses the free surface moment for the current fluid level of the tank in upright condition. When the corrected VCG method is selected in the analysis menu.(69) Ch 3. it is possible to choose the type of free surface moment to be applied for each tank in a Hydromax Loadcase. making the tanks‟ free-surface parallel to the sea surface. This can be loaded into Hydromax and referenced in any Loadcase. Workshop structure Workshop can save a Loadgroup that contains the masses of all the structural parts. Hydromax calculates the actual position of the fluid in the tanks taking into account heel and trim. Instead. IMO Hydromax uses IMO MSC75. thus the actual vessel CG is recalculated accounting exactly for the static shift of the fluids in slack tanks. Besides a general explanation on how to model tanks using the compartment definition table.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Free surface correction If the corrected VCG fluid option has been chosen. no correction is made to the upright VCG.

make sure you have created a Compartment definition file. 'A Top'. Box shaped compartments can be formed from the numerical values in the compartment definition table. and the port and starboard limits of the tank. or an analysis started. The boundary box is made up of the fore and aft extremities of the tank. Compartments may be added or deleted by  Select Add or Delete Compartment from the Edit menu. Each value defines one of the six planes of the tank. You will notice that aft columns contain the word "ditto". Hydromax will form the sections that define the tanks and compartments. This means that the value is identical at the aft end of the tank to the forward end. The 'F' and 'A' abbreviations stand for Forward and Aft. When the “Update Loadcase” command from the Analysis menu is used. This is done by finding the intersection of the tank bounding box and the hull. Add will add a tank after the currently selected compartment and Delete will delete the currently selected compartment(s). The accelerator keys Ctrl+A and the Delete key may also be used to add and delete entries respectively. Modelling Box Shape Tanks Simple tanks and compartments are created by specifying six values that define a boxshaped boundary for the tank. Adding and Deleting Compartments Before you can start adding compartments. in other words the two ends of the compartment. See Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 67 for some recommendations regarding setting the boundary box. The column headings in the Compartment Definition table include terms such as 'F Bottom.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax This will give you a new set of compartment definitions with one default tank. see above. This box will be called the Boundary Box. Page 52 . Thus it is not necessary to make the tanks fit the hull manually – this is done automatically by Hydromax. 'F Port' and 'A Starboard'. resulting in a parallel tank. the top and bottom.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Modelling Tapered Tanks

The default is for compartments to have parallel sides. If you wish to define tapered compartments, it is possible to enter different transverse and vertical values for the points defining the forward and aft ends of the compartment. If a different value is entered in one of the “ditto” columns, a tapered tank will result. Tanks can be tapered or sloped in Plan or Profile views. Hydromax does not have a mechanism for creating a sloped tank boundary in the Body Plan view.

By changing the “ditto”-input fields, tapered tanks can be formed

Note: Tapering can be done in Plan and in Profile view. Tapered tanks in Body Plan view have to be created using a boundary surface. See Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces on page 54.
Linked Tanks

Tanks and compartments may be linked. This means that although they are defined as separate tanks, they act as a single tank with a common free surface. To link tanks, compartments or non-buoyant volumes, first make them the same type as the parent and give them the same name. The easiest way to do this is to copy and paste the name from the Name column of the parent row into the Name column of the linked tank row. They may then be linked to the parent by typing l or linked in the Type column. Linked tanks and compartments do not have to be physically linked in space. However, the fluid in a linked tank or damaged compartment is always assumed to be able to flow freely between the linked volumes.

Page 53

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces

Tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes may have their boundaries defined by surfaces as well as being constrained to particular dimensions. This allows for the modelling of arbitrarily shaped tanks.

Forming tanks using boundary surfaces

The surfaces to be used to define the tank boundaries are selected by clicking in the Boundary Surfaces column in the middle of the Compartments Definition table. A dialog will appear that allows you to select which surfaces form the boundary of the tank. If a tank uses boundary surfaces, the cell in the Boundary Surfaces column is coloured blue.

Page 54

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

If you wish to use a Maxsurf surface to define a tank or compartment, tick next to the surface name in the Boundary Surface list. Note that symmetrical surfaces appear twice as there will be a starboard and a port side copy of the surface. The Starboard surface is first in the list and the Port surface second. The port surface is also identified with the suffix (P) after the name. Note: Only internal structure surfaces appear in the boundary surfaces list. Symmetrical surfaces are duplicated, with the port-side surface having “(P)” appended to the surface name. After selecting the internal surfaces, it is necessary to type in the extents of the boundary box. Hydromax will automatically set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits of the boundary box to just within the longitudinal limits of the Boundary Surface. This ensures that at least 12 sections are inserted in the tank. Also see: Forming Compartments on page 62 Number of Sections in Tanks on page 67 Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 67
Modelling External Tanks

External tanks may not be modelled in Hydromax. However, it is normally possible to add "Hull" surfaces in the Maxsurf model, which will enclose the external tanks. The tanks can then be modelled in Hydromax.

Additional box-shaped hull surfaces used to define deck tanks

Page 55

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Modelling Non-Buoyant Volumes

Non-buoyant volumes are effectively permanently flooded compartments. These parts of the hull can normally be modelled using trimmed hull surfaces. However, there are occasions where it is more convenient to use non-buoyant volumes. In some cases, where the volume to be flooded forms sections within the hydrostatic section, this is the only option, e.g. waterjet ducts. The choice whether to use trimmed surfaces or nonbuoyant volumes is primarily determined by the length of the non-buoyant volume relative to the length of the vessel. Using trimmed hull surfaces When the length of the non-buoyant volume, relative to the length of the model, is large enough; the non-buoyant volume can be calculated accurately from the hull sections. If possible, trimmed surfaces should be used. The picture below is a good example of when to use trimmed surfaces.

Propeller tunnels modelled with trimming surfaces

Using tank type: Non-buoyant volume In some cases using trimmed surfaces is just not possible. For example, when the sections of the non-buoyant volume are entirely enclosed within the hull sections (as is the case for a water jet duct) the use of a non-buoyant volume is the only way in which these features can be modelled.

Water-jet ducts modelled as non-buoyant volumes

Page 56

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Another occasion when non-buoyant volumes should be used, is when the length of the compartment relative to the length of the hull is too small to calculate its volume from the hull sections. A good example of this is a bow thruster on a long ship. If the vessel is very long, and the thruster duct is of small diameter, there may not be sufficient sections to model it accurately (even if you use the maximum of 200 sections for the Hydromax model). In this case you are better off modelling the thruster duct as internal structure and using these surfaces to define a non-buoyant volume. For example: in the image below the bow thruster volume is only calculated with one section.

For more information, see Number of Sections in Tanks on page 67. Tip: Besides increasing the number of sections through the bow thruster from 1 to 12, modelling the thruster duct as a non-buoyant volume has the additional advantage of being able to specify a Tank and Compartment Permeability, and hence also account for the thruster.

Bow thruster tube modelled as two non-buoyant volumes Tanks within Compartments

When a tank is defined within a compartment, Hydromax will automatically deduct the volume of the tank from the compartment volume using a “linked neg. (negative) compartment”. This is necessary for damage cases where the compartment is flooded and the volume of the tank should be treated completely separately from the compartment. Linked negative compartments are deleted and recreated whenever a tank or compartment is added, deleted or modified. Negatively linked compartments are displayed on the bottom of the Compartment Definition table solely for reference purposes and are not under direct user control. This means that linked negative compartments cannot be added, deleted or modified.
Page 57

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Linked negative compartments are named based on both the parent compartment as well as the tank from which the linked negative compartment was derived. For example a linked negative compartment might be named “Compartment3 (Stbd Hydr Oil)” to reflect that it is derived from the intersection of Compartment3 with the Stbd Hydr Oil tank.
Tanks Overlapping

As mentioned earlier in this manual, only compartments and non buoyant volumes or tanks can overlap with each other. Tanks or compartments of the same type (eg two tanks) can not overlap. A tank and a non-buoyant volume are also not allowed to overlap. Hydromax will first try to form tank sections and then check whether these sections overlap tank sections of adjacent tanks. When two conflicting or overlapping tanks or compartments are detected during the forming process, you will receive an error message:

Notice that the compartment definition row number of the tank is given in brackets i.e. tank #8 intersects tank #3.

Troubleshooting Overlapping Tanks Sometimes the reason for the conflict can be quite simple: eg an overlapping boundary box. However, when you are modelling tanks using boundary surfaces, the surface boundaries act as a boundary between two adjacent tanks and the bounding box extents are allowed to overlap. In these cases, it can be quite difficult to see why the tanks overlap, especially if you have a large number of tanks already defined.

By temporarily deleting all tanks except for the one that does not form, it often becomes clear why the tank overlaps. In the case of the image above, the tank‟s fwd most section goes all the way to the CL (probably because the fwd boundary box extent is just fwd of the boundary surfaces or exactly on the edge of a boundary surface). This causes this particular tank to “overlap” with surrounding tanks.
Page 58

Compartments and non-buoyant volumes have only one permeability. the engines and equipment could also be modelled individually as empty tanks. In the case of damaged tanks and compartments. for example. Permeability of Compartments As opposed to tanks. Save & move on to next compartment. Page 59 . Depending on the level of accuracy required. For example an engine room with engines and auxiliaries at the tanktop could be divided up in a lower. the permeability fraction is also applied to the free-surface-moment contribution of that tank or compartment. one. eg by selecting additional boundary surfaces Close comp def file. In case of large variations in permeability within a compartment it is recommended to model separate linked compartments with separate permeability to increase accuracy.. which is used when the tank is intact.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Procedure to Fix Overlapping Tanks:       Save Model Go into Comp def window Save comp def Delete all tanks except for one you wish to investigate form tanks. thought it is listed in both columns.and an upper engine room compartment. compartments typically have structure (other than plate stiffeners) and equipment inside. Now that you know how to fix it. The compartment permeability is applied when the compartment is flooded in a damage condition and the non-buoyant volume permeability is applied at all times since it is always flooded.     Tank and Compartment Permeability Tanks may have two permeabilities. and the other when it is damaged. 60% and the upper compartment a permeability of 95%. Do NOT save!! Open saved Comp def file Fix compartment. Relative Density of Tank Fluids Relative Density (Specific Gravity) values can be typed directly into the Relative Density column of the Compartment Definition table. The lower compartment will have a permeability of. inspect tank sections Try to fix tank definition.

turn off the display of intact tanks and compartments. the default density specified here in the compartment definition may be overridden in the loadcases. Groups of linked tanks and compartments will be moved together. Select the rows you wish to use and use the Edit | Move Items Up or Down commands (there is no provision for sorting tanks alphabetically). hence you should design these surfaces to the inside of the tank. Note: Thickness of boundary surfaces are not taken into account. all entries for that fluid in the compartment definition are automatically updated. compartments and non-buoyant volumes will correctly account for the surface thickness and its projection direction: the tanks will go to the inside of the hull shell.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Alternatively the fluid type can be entered into the Fluid Type column. You can either control the tank visibility through the Assembly window. Tanks and Surface Thickness If you have specified that Hydromax should include the surface thickness. Page 60 . Whenever values are changed in the Density dialog (see Density of Fluids on page 150). the relative density value is obtained from the value specified in the Density dialog. the tanks. you can use damage cases to quickly change the display to show certain tanks. Assembly view can be used to show and hide tanks/compartments Using damage cases. Compartment and Tank Visibility When creating complicated tank plans. selected tanks may be displayed in the following manner:   Define a damage case Select only damaged tanks and compartments for display. If the tank defines a cargo tank that will carry different liquid cargoes. it is often useful to check individual tanks. If a fluid type is entered. either as the name or as one of the single letter codes (when entering the name. so it is normally only necessary to type the first few letter of the name). auto complete is used. Compartment and Tank Ordering The tank definition order can be adjusted in a similar way to loads in the loadcase. or if you prefer.

Using a damage case to quickly change the tank and compartment visibility Tank sections When in Tank Calibration mode. Choose the damage case from the Analysis toolbar Set any of the tanks and compartments you wish to be visible to damaged in the damage case window. tank sections are also displayed in the Bodyplan view when the “Show single section” option is selected. Page 61 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax  Select whether you want to see the tank outline or the tank sections (tanks sections are preferable when checking that tanks have been formed correctly since it is these sections which are used to determine the tank volume and other properties).   You can make the damage case window quite small and tile it next to the perspective view. Use this to quickly turn tanks on and off by changing their damage status. Only tank sections that lie on or near the current station are shown – this makes it easier to verify that the tanks have been formed.

Step-by-Step Tank Forming Process As an example.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Forming Compartments Tanks and compartments are formed automatically by Hydromax (once the tank extents and any boundary surfaces have been defined) by selecting Recalculate Tanks and Compartments from the Analysis menu. First a step-by-step outline of the tank forming process is given. Hydromax uses three input items to form the compartment Boundary surfaces (if defined) Boundary box Hydromax Hull sections Starting position The starboard tank margin plate is modelled using an Internal Structure surface from Maxsurf. The formed status of a tank (yes or no) is shown in the last column of the compartment definition table. followed by the tank section insertion process. The water ballast tanks have a margin plate on the side. the starboard waterballast tank below will be created using boundary surfaces. An example of a port and starboard waterballast tank with a pipe tunnel at the centreline. Understanding these processes may assist you in rare situations where the tank forming does not work as expected. This section describes the internal tank-forming process that Hydromax uses to form tanks. Starting point: Hydromax Hull sections with an internal surface and a bounding box Also see: Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces on page 54 and the Maxsurf manual on internal structure surfaces Page 62 .

Hydromax will use the trimmed internal structure surface. the surfaces selected to form the tank boundary must form closed section contours at all longitudinal positions through the tank. Usually the internal structure surfaces are best to be left untrimmed. Often a tank is not formed as expected because only one side of the internal structure surface was selected for example the portside (p). Make sure that the boundary surfaces: Form a closed section contour. As with the hull sections. The tank or compartment looks like this at this stage: Page 63 . Hydromax uses the same method for forming the tank section from the boundary surfaces as for forming the hydrostatic sections through the hull. Step 2: Clip to Boundary Surface Using the closed surface section contour Hydromax can now form a closed compartment section. or There is no more than one opening – the opening will be closed with a straight line Note: Hydromax will close the section contour of the selected boundary surfaces only.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Step 1: Close Internal Structure Surface Hydromax will close the Internal Structure Surface contour by drawing a straight line between the ends of the opening. The area inside the selected surfaces will define the tank contour. Another common cause of unexpected results is trimming. If you selected “use trimmed surfaces” while opening the Maxsurf model.

The boundary box is formed from the numerical input in the Compartment definition table.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Step 3: Clip to Hull Hydromax will clip the compartment section to the hull. In practice additional surfaces would be required. A more realistic example is shown in the following section. More realistic surface-bounded tanks Whilst the above example shows the principles by which surface-bounded tanks are formed. In this example the vessel has both wing and double bottom tanks with non-rectangular cross-sections thus requiring them to be defined by boundary surfaces – see blow: Page 64 . Step 4: Clip to Boundary Box Finally the compartment section is clipped to the boundary box. it is not really realistic because it would not be possible to define a tank above the surface-bounded double bottom tanks.

OuterClosure (S). OuterClosure (P). TankTop. TankBilgePlate (S) Page 65 . BottomClosure (P). TankWing (P). TankBilgePlate (P) Double Bottom (S) TankTop (S). TankBilgePlate (S) Wing Ballast (P) TankWing (P). TankBilgePlate (P) Wing Ballast (S) TankWing (S). BottomClosure (S).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Sketch of tank cross-sections Five surfaces have been defined to define the tank boundaries: Tank Boundary surfaces defined in Maxsurf The following surfaces need to be selected for the different tanks so that closed sections are generated (or at most one section) Hold (C) TankWing. TankTop (P) Double Bottom (P) TankTop (P).

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Hydromax tank definition Surfaces for Hold (C) (top is closed automatically) Page 66 .

Also see Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 67 Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box For tanks near the ship‟s extremities it is good practise to set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits in the compartment table to just inside the hull surface (say 1mm). The following example illustrates why: Page 67 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Surfaces for double bottom tanks Surfaces for wing tanks (top is closed automatically) Number of Sections in Tanks The volume of a tank or compartments is calculated by integrating section properties along the length of the tank. If this results in a section spacing greater than the spacing for the hull spacing. this will be done automatically by Hydromax. In most cases. Thus it is important to have a sufficiently large number of sections to accurately model the tank. additional sections will be inserted into the tank so that the tank section spacing match the hull section spacing. Hydromax will normally place twelve sections between the forward and aft limits defining the tank.

But if the boundary box is set just inside the forward limit of the bulbous bow: To recap – Near the ship‟s extremities. Note that transversely and vertically there are no such restrictions. the longitudinal extents should not be set to extreme values.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax If the boundary box is set like this: The number of hull sections is dependent on the section spacing in the model. they should be set to just inside the extents of the hull surfaces to ensure that at least 12 sections are used to calculate the tank volumes. linked compartments and non-buoyant volumes. compartments. Page 68 . Hydromax will automatically set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits of the boundary box to just within the longitudinal limits of the boundary surface. linked tanks. This ensures that at least 12 sections are inserted in the tank.tanks. For internal structure surfaces that are used as boundary surface. Also see Number of Sections in Tanks on page 67 Forming Compartments on page 62 Compartment Types Five compartment types can be created using the Compartment Definition table .

shown below. c or n) in the Type column of the Compartment Definition table and then press Enter. Non-Buoyant Volumes Are only used to specify compartments of the vessel which are permanently flooded up to the static waterline.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Tanks Will be included in the tank calibration output and are automatically added to the loadcase. In this case the tank linking simulates tanks with cross connections. Automatically created sounding pipes will be recalculated if the tank geometry changes. However. This will automatically set the tank/compartment to the correct type. They are not included in the tank calibration output and will not be added to the loadcase. Tanks need not be adjoining to be linked.g. Compartments Are only used to specify compartmentation for damage. Hydromax creates a default sounding pipe when the tank is formed (either by running an analysis. the bottom of the tank is flat either longitudinally or transversely) the default sounding pipe location is placed at the aft-most low point and as close to the centreline as possible. They are ideal for defining water-jet ducts. Sounding Pipes Hydromax allows sounding pipes to be defined for each tank. you need to use the Sounding Pipes table in the Input window. once the sounding pipe has been edited manually. or Analysis | Update Loadcase. bent or curved sounding pipes to be modelled. any tank that it is linked to will also be regarded as damaged. Linked Tanks Will have their volume added to the parent tank with the same tank name. moon pools. type the first character of the tank type (t. they can be remote from one another. or using one of the following commands: Analysis | Recalculate Tanks and Compartments. One sounding pipe per tank is permitted and up to nine vertices per sounding pipe. and essentially behave as damaged compartments. The default sounding pipe is placed at the longitudinal and transverse position of the lowest point of the tank. In addition. The top of the sounding pipe is taken to be level with the highest point of the tank and the default sounding pipe is assumed to be straight and vertical. if a tank is damaged. Linked Compartments Work in the same way as linked tanks. allowing inclined. any changes to the sounding pipe due to tank geometry changes will also have to be made manually. To change the type of a tank. They do not have a separate entry in the loadcase. This allows you to damage a complex compartment configuration by linking compartments together and damaging the parent compartment. Edit Sounding Pipes To customise a sounding pipe. Page 69 . If the lowest point of the tank is shared between several locations (e. They are not included in the tank calibration output and will not be added to the loadcase. etc.

by clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the Input window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax You can activate this window by selecting from the Windows | Input | Sounding Pipes menu. To add vertices to create a bent sounding pipe. it is not acceptable to have S-bends in the sounding pipes. A new row will be added to the sounding pipe and the longitudinal position. Note that each successive vertex in a sounding pipe must be no higher than the previous vertex i. This is done by specifying a numerical value for the increment for each tank in the Calibration Spacing column of the Sounding Pipes Input window.  Type the value of the desired calibration increment in the Calibration Spacing cell for the tank calibration you wish to modify. Page 70 . Calibration Increment Hydromax allows user definable increments (or: intervals) for tank soundings. offset and height of the vertex can be edited. Hydromax uses its default value based on a reasonable division of the depth of the tank.e. In this case the Sounding Pipes table will display “Auto” in the Calibration Increment column for the tank. then click on the first row of a particular sounding pipe and choose Edit | Add or use the Ctrl+A key combination. If no increment is entered. or by clicking on the icon in the window toolbar. make the sounding pipe type User Defined. Unwanted vertices can be deleted by clicking on the relevant row in the table and selecting Edit | Delete or by hitting the Delete key.

select the intact case column. Volumes that are permanently flooded should be defined as non-buoyant volumes. You may specify a name for the Damage Case in the dialog. Hydromax is capable of including the effects of user-defined damage. the current damage case is selected from the Analysis toolbar – see below. Renaming a Damage Case The name of the current damage case may be changed by selecting Edit Damage Case when the damage case window is active. Note that it is not possible to delete the intact case. not along the vertical axis of the tank. Damage Case Definition In all but the floodable length and tank calibration analysis modes. The new damage case is added after the currently selected damage case column. If the sounding pipe is inclined or if it has multiple angles. Page 71 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note Increments are measured along the sounding pipe. Deleting a Damage Case To delete damage cases. Several damage cases may be added in one go by selecting a number of columns. Each new damage case will have a column in the Damage Window and a tick may be placed to indicate which tanks and compartments are damaged for that particular Damage Case. make the Damage window active and select Add Damage Case from the Case menu. Hydromax allows the user to set up a number of damage cases. to insert a damage case immediately after the intact case. Adding a Damage Case To add a damage case. soundings will step evenly along the inclined length of the sounding pipe. simply select the columns to be deleted in the Damage Window and select Delete Damage Case from the Case menu.

Page 72 . all damaged tanks and compartments will be displayed in damaged tank or damaged compartment colour respectively. you should toggle the damage status of the damaged tanks. These colours can be specified in the View | Colours and lines menu. Any tank fluids are treated as having been completely replaced by seawater up to the equilibrium waterline. This is simply done by copying all the damage case data to a spread sheet. When tanks have been damaged. Note: Hydromax uses the “Lost buoyancy” method rather than “Added mass”. select Intact as the current damage case. To perform analyses for the intact vessel. their weights and levers are no longer displayed in the Loadcase window and the word „Damage‟ is displayed in the quantity column. Note that carrying out a Tank Calibration analysis will force the intact case to be selected. This is also the case for the Floodable Length analysis which effectively sets up its own longitudinal extent of damage. Displaying Damage Cases When a damage case is selected. If you have linked tanks or compartments or added tanks within compartments after the definition of a damage case. Any subsequent analyses will take into account the damaged compartments. This is because Hydromax uses the “Lost buoyancy” method rather than “Added mass”. In the Loadcase Window damaged tanks are displayed with the label 'Damaged' in the Quantity column. turning off all damage in all the damage cases (use the fill down command) and then pasting back in the original data from where it was stored in the spreadsheet.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Selecting a Damage Case The current damage case is selected from the Analysis toolbar. Hydromax assumes that all compartment definition has been done after the tanks have been defined. The Loadcase and View windows will reflect the damage defined in the current damage case. and all values set to zero. Flooding is considered to be instantaneous up to sea level.

Extent of Damage Cases The damaged compartments can automatically be set by using the Case | Extent of damage command. Select the column of the damage case you wish to specify the extent of damage for and choose Extent of Damage from the case menu: Page 73 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The Loadcase Window displays damaged tanks and excludes them from any calculations.

choose Add from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+A. select New Key Points from the File menu. Specify the extent of the damage – any tanks or compartments that lie partially or wholly within the extent of damage will be automatically flagged as damaged: Automatically generated damage case from using Extent of Damage command. There are several types of Key Points: Down Flooding points Potential Down flooding points Embarkation points Immersion Points Only downflooding points are used in determining the downflooding angle. Adding Key Points To start adding downflooding points go to the Key Points table. To delete more than one point at a time. A new point will be inserted below the currently selected row in the table. Key Points (e. Page 74 . Down Flooding Points) Key points such as downflooding points and hatch openings can be defined in Hydromax using the Key Points window. To add additional key points to the table. The other types of points have their freeboard measured but are not used for the evaluation of the downflooding angle and are for information only. Vessels which have symmetrical key points on starboard and port sides must have both key points added to the table. You will be given a default point.g. Immersed key points will be displayed in the same colour as flooded tanks or compartments. a positive offset is to starboard and a negative offset is to port. click anywhere in the row of the point to be deleted and select Delete. click and drag over the rows you want deleted. Deleting Key Points To delete a Key point. The points may be displayed in the Design View window and will be displayed in different colours depending on whether or not they are immersed. Key points may be placed asymmetrically. which is used in criteria evaluation.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Defining the damaged compartments by specify the extent of damage.

and a height. and the selected rows will be deleted. Select the tank or compartment from the combo-box in the Linked to column of the Down Flooding Points table in the Input window: Downflooding points that are linked to tanks or compartments. which are damaged in the currently selected damage case. Click in any cell and enter the name or value you require. a transverse offset from the centreline. a longitudinal position.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Select Delete from the Edit menu. The type of Key Point may be selected from the combo-box in the Type column of the Down Flooding Points table in the Input window: Links to Tanks or Compartments Downflooding points may be linked to tanks or compartments. Editing Key Points Key points are defined by entering a name. All points are entered relative to the zero point. will be ignored when computing the downflooding angle. These downflooding points will appear italicised and an asterisk (*) is postfixed to the downflooding point‟s name in the DF Angles table of the Results window: Page 75 .

Asymmetric margin lines and deck edges are not supported. immersion angles or freeboards (depending on the analysis) are also given for the margin line and deck edge. Hydromax automatically calculates the position of the margin line 76mm below the deck edge when the hull is first read in. This form of automatic flooding is not supported in Hydromax yet. Immersed points are highlighted in red in the Freeboard column. It is only necessary to modify the height value of the margin line points. the points on the margin line may be edited manually in the Margin Line Points window (the deck edge is automatically updated so that it is kept 76mm above the margin line). Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments The Modulus window can be used to enter maximum allowable shear forces and bending moments for each section. The modulus value is not currently used as deflections are not calculated. Points may be added or deleted as required using the procedure described in Adding Key Points and Deleting Key Points on page 74. Margin Line Points The margin line is used in a number of the criteria. selecting Snap Margin Line to Hull in the Analysis menu will project all of the points horizontally onto the hull surface. If necessary. In the Name column the longitudinal position where immersion first takes place (or the lowest freeboard) is given. Note: Linking a downflooding point to a tank does not mean that Hydromax will consider a tank damaged when the downflooding point is submerged. The downflooding angles are computed during a large angle stability analysis.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The downflooding angles for each of the points are displayed in the results window. Once this has been done for all the points that need to be changed. Page 76 . ensuring that the margin line follows the hull shape precisely. In addition to the Key Points results. Allowable shear force and/or bending moment can be specified at each point. the freeboards after an Equilibrium or Specified Condition analysis. One or more points can be entered in this window.

The allowable values can be saved and recalled as text files by using Open and Save from the File menu. The Bulkheads are automatically sorted by longitudinal position. Floodable Length Bulkheads Bulkheads entered in the Input window are used for Floodable Length analysis in order to optionally plot the compartment lengths in the floodable length graph for easy verification that the critical compartment lengths are not exceeded. Stability criteria are required to perform a limiting KG and Floodable Length analysis. bring the Modulus table to the front and choose New Modulus Points from the File menu with the Modulus window frontmost. Points may be added or deleted as required using the procedure described for the key points. Analysis Types After specifying the input values and checking the Hydromax model. the analysis can be performed. For more information see Floodable Length on page 102. Stability Criteria Stability criteria may be evaluated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and after an Equilibrium analysis. Please refer to Chapter 4 Stability Criteria starting at page 163 for information on defining and selecting criteria. New allowable values can be inserted by selecting Add from the Edit menu and entering a longitudinal position as well as an allowable shear and/or moment. The following analysis types are available in Hydromax: Upright Hydrostatics Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Analysis Specified Conditions KN Values Analysis Limiting KG Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength Tank Calibrations MARPOL Oil Outflow Probabilistic Damage Also. some general information is given on: Page 77 . In this section the different analysis types available in Hydromax will be described.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax To start a table of allowable shear forces and bending moments. These allowable values are displayed as lines on the longitudinal strength graph.

you may specify a fixed trim for all drafts A range of drafts for upright hydrostatic calculations can be specified using the Drafts command from the Analysis menu. The Data Format dialog can be used to specify what is displayed in some graphs and tables.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Starting and Stopping Analyses Batch Analysis The required analysis settings and environment options will be discussed separately and in more detail in the next two sections of this chapter. Page 78 . one or more graphs may be shown – select the graph to be displayed from the pull-down menu in the Graph window. the available options depends on the current results table or graph: Data format dialog for Upright hydrostatics table and graph Upright Hydrostatics Upright hydrostatics lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the hull at a range of drafts. at zero or other fixed trim. specify range of drafts for analysis Trim from the Analysis menu. Following each analysis. Choosing Upright Hydrostatics Select Upright Hydrostatics from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. Upright Hydrostatic Analysis Settings The following analysis settings apply for Upright Hydrostatic Analysis: Draft from the Analysis menu.

the LCG also affects these measurements). the initial draft defaults to the draft at the DWL in Maxsurf. When a design is first opened. Similarly the VCG defaults to the height of the DWL.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Initial and final drafts can be entered. The Vertical Centre of Gravity is also required for the calculation of GM etc (if the vessel is trimmed. together with the number of drafts to be used. Upright Hydrostatics Environment Options The following environments can be applied to the upright hydrostatics analysis: Density from the Analysis menu Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Upright Hydrostatic Results Page 79 .

the heel range and heel angle steps should be chosen accordingly. Page 80 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The curves of form are shown on a separate graph and the sectional area may be show for any of the drafts: see Select View from Analysis Data on page 159. Large Angle Stability Large angle stability lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the hull at a range of heel angles either with or without trim or free-to-trim. Choosing Large Angle Stability Select Large Angle Stability from the Analysis menu or toolbar. Large Angle Stability Settings The following analysis settings apply for Large Angle Stability Analysis: Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window Heel from the Analysis menu. select range for analysis Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu If criteria are being evaluated. to ensure accurate evaluation of the criteria.

Some criteria require calculations of GZ at negative heel. For example: when using a -180 to 180 heel range. the one that would be reported in the criteria would be the one with a positive heel angle (even if the one at negative heel occurred at an angle closer to zero). Also see: Heel on page 141 in the Analysis Settings section. the results may be two angles of vanishing stability. Large Angle Stability Environment Options The following environments can be applied to the large angle stability analysis: Fluid simulation of tank fluids centre of gravity Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Stability Criteria Large Angle Stability Results Large Angle Stability Analysis results are: Hydrostatic data table for each angle of heel GZ curve Dynamic stability (GZ area) curve Graph of hydrostatic parameters against heel angle Graph of max. you can enter negative values and test full 360 degrees of stability if you wish. The criteria are only evaluated on the side of the graph that corresponds to positive heel angles. However. deck edge and margin line Curve of areas at each heel angle Page 81 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note You can select positive heel direction (port or starboard). safe steady heel angle Stability Criteria evaluation Downflooding angles to key points.

Shows the variation of hydrodynamic properties with heel angle. features such as downflooding angle are also included on the graph. for example the angle of downflooding or angle of deck edge immersion. Page 82 . Curves of Form. you can display the maximum safe heeling angle curves by selecting the graph type in the pull-down menu. Once a GZ curve has been calculated. Large Angle stability Graph. Graph of maximum safe steady heeling angles for sailing vessels These calculations are derived from the value of GZ at a critical heel angle. Curve of Areas Shows the curve of areas for the currently selected heel angle (use Display | Select view from data to chose the heel angle from the GZ results table).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Dynamic stability Graph A graph of the GZ area integrated from upright may be plotted.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The parameters for the calculation can be modified in the Display | Data Format dialog (this graph must be selected in the topmost window): Page 83 .

You can also change the shape of the heeling arm curve and the gust ratio.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Analysis options for the calculation of Maximum steady heel angles (Display | Data Format). It can often be useful to duplicate this criterion in the GZ criteria that are evaluated.derived wind heeling arm” criterion. This allows you to specify the critical condition that should not be exceeded due to a gust or squall. MCA require downflooding but you can include additional criteria if desired. This will give you the same result as for the gust limiting line. 45 and 60kts. Finally you can adjust the axis limits. In the lower-left. Page 84 . The first part of the dialog is almost exactly the same as the “Angle of equilibrium . This is because normally you will have computed a GZ curve for a wider heel range than you would wish to display in this graph – it is uncommon to sail a vessel with a steady heel angle of greater than 40 degrees. you can specify the squall wind speeds (you can add any number) The default gives three wind speeds of 30.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The same safe angle of heel to prevent downflooding in the event of a gust (16. the most common reason for this is that the GZ curve has not been calculated up to a sufficiently high angle of heel and downflooding angle cannot be found. the GZ curve should be calculated at small intervals of heel.5 deg) is found. especially at the lower heel angles – typically steps of 1degree. Full details of the calculations can be found in: Page 85 . To obtain smooth curves. it may not be possible to evaluate the curves. Under some circumstances.

Downflooding points that are linked to tanks or compartments that are damaged in the currently selected damage case. Claughton. and an asterisk (*) is postfixed to the downflooding point‟s name in the Key Point Data table of the Results window. Emergence angles of the key points is also calculated – this is where they cross the waterline in an upward direction to become dry. the Key Points Data table lists the downflooding angles of the margin line.mcga. Only the positive downflooding angles are displayed. becoming wet. ed. will be ignored when computing the downflooding angle.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Sailing Yacht Design: Practice. Also see: Select View from Analysis Data on page 159. For more information on how to customize the display of the criteria results. Page 86 . Wellicome and Shenoi.uk Stability Criteria Evaluation The criteria results are displayed in the Criteria tab in the results window. the first downflooding point is marked on the large angle stability graph. www. as opposed to the immersion angle which is when the cross the waterline in a downward direction. the large angle stability analysis should be carried out heeling both to starboard and to port. Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria. For the margin line and deck edge the longitudinal position at which immersion first occurred is provided. These downflooding points will appear italicised. Adison Wesley Longman 1998. In addition. please refer to the Results Window on page 185 in the reference section.gov. ISBN 0-582-36857-X STABILITY INFORMATION BOOKLET available from the MCA. see: Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. hence if there is any asymmetry. A downflooding angle of zero degrees indicates that the key point is immersed at zero degrees of heel. Downflooding Angle After a Large Angle Stability analysis. deck edge and defined Key Points.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Equilibrium Analysis

Equilibrium analysis lets you determine the draft, heel and trim of the hull as a result of the loads applied in the table in the Loadcase window. The analysis can be carried out in flat water or in a waveform.
Choosing Equilibrium Analysis

Select Equilibrium from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu.
Equilibrium Analysis Settings

Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window

Also see: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18
Equilibrium Analysis Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the Equilibrium analysis:
Fluid simulation of tank fluid centre of gravity Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Grounding (if any) Criteria

Equilibrium Results

Equilibrium Results are:
Hydrostatic data Freeboard of key points, deck edge and margin line Criteria evaluation Wave phase animation Curve of areas

Page 87

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Hydrostatic data

Height/freeboard above free surface The freeboard of each Key Point is also calculated. The freeboard is for the vessel condition currently displayed in the Design view and is recalculated after each Equilibrium and Specified Conditions analysis. The freeboard calculated is the vertical distance of the Key Point above the local free surface; hence the local free surface height if a waveform is selected will be taken into account.

Freeboard of key points.

Negative freeboards, i.e. where the Key Points are immersed are displayed in red. The longitudinal positions at which the minimum freeboard for the margin line and deck edge occurred are also specified. Stability Criteria Evaluation The criteria results are displayed in the Criteria tab in the results window.

Page 88

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Equilibrium Animation in Waves If performed in conjunction with analysis in waves, the Equilibrium analysis will automatically phase-step the waveform through a complete wavelength. This gives ten columns of results, one for each position of the wave crest. If necessary the results of this phase stepping can be animated giving a simple, quasi-static simulation of the hull motion in waves (Display | Animate). Note: This simulation only includes static behaviour at each wave phase, and does not cover dynamic or inertial forces. This can be done using Seakeeper.
Equilibrium Concept

The definition of equilibrium is “Position or state where object will remain if undisturbed”. You can distinguish equilibrium into two types:
Stable, when disturbed the object will return to its equilibrium position Unstable, when disturbed the object will not return to its equilibrium position

Stable equilibrium

Unstable equilibrium

With ships, an unstable equilibrium can exist when the KG > KM, i.e. the centre of gravity is above the metacentre (negative GMt). In real world a ship in unstable equilibrium will roll from the upright unstable equilibrium position to a position of stable equilibrium and assume an “angle of loll”. Since Hydromax starts the equilibrium analysis in upright position, it has no way of determining whether the equilibrium is stable or unstable. This means that unstable equilibrium may be found instead of the stable equilibrium. Therefore it is recommend to check the value of GMt yourself after doing an equilibrium analysis or perform a Large Angle Stability analysis and look at the slope of the GZ curve through the equilibrium heel angle.

Page 89

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Unstable equilibrium

Stable equilibrium ”Angle of loll”

The graph above shows the results of a Large Angle Stability analysis for a vessel with negative initial GMt. In practice this vessel would have a loll angle of approximately 25 degrees. If an equilibrium analysis is performed for this vessel with the transverse arm set to zero, Hydromax will find the unstable equilibrium position with zero degrees of heel. In practice, it is desirable to find the stable equilibrium position. To do this, first ensure that the tolerances (Edit | Preferences) are set as sensitive as possible. This will ensure that the smallest possible heeling moment is required to find stable equilibrium position. Then create a very small heeling moment by offsetting one of the weight items in the loadcase window TCG by just a fraction. The equilibrium analysis will now find the stable equilibrium position. Note: It is good practice to always perform a Large Angle Stability analysis as well as the equilibrium analysis to check if the vessel is in stable or unstable equilibrium. This is most likely to occur if the VCG is too high and the vessel has negative GM when upright. The problem can be overcome by offsetting the weight of the vessel transversely by a small amount.
Specified Conditions

Specified Condition analysis lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the vessel by specifying the heel, trim and immersion. Heel can be specified by either the angle of heel or the TCG and VCG. Trim can be specified by the actual trim measurement, or the LCG and VCG. Immersion can be specified by either the displacement or the draft.
Choosing Specified Conditions

Select Specified Conditions from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Page 90

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Specified Conditions Settings

The settings required for Specified Condition analysis are:
Specified Conditions from the Analysis menu

Three Sets of variables are provided, labelled Heel, Trim and Immersion. One choice must be made from each of these groups. Hydromax will then solve for the vessel hydrostatics at the conditions specified.

Values from the current loading condition can be inserted into the Centre of Gravity and Displacement fields by clicking on the Get Loadcase Values button. Also see: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18 Specified Conditions on page 145 in the Analysis Settings section. Note: If the fluid simulation has been turned on in a previous analysis mode, then the VCG obtained from the loadcase will not include the free surface correction; the “Get Loadcase Values” button will return exactly the displacement and CG as displayed in the current loadcase window. The specified condition analysis itself ignores tank fillings and does no correction to VCG.
Specified Conditions Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the Specified Condition analysis:
Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar

Specified Conditions Results

The specified conditions results are the same as equilibrium analysis results except that criteria are not evaluated, i.e. hydrostatic data and key points freeboard are calculated.

Page 91

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

KN Values Analysis

KN Values Analysis allows you to determine the hydrostatic properties of the hull at a range of heel angles and displacements to produce the cross curves of stability diagram.
Choosing KN Values Analysis

Select KN Values from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.
KN Values Analysis Settings

The analysis settings required for KN Values analysis are:
Heel from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu Displacement from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis and specify estimate of VCG if known

The heel angles used may differ from those used in the Large Angle Stability and Limiting KG analyses. To set the range of angles, select Heel from the Analysis menu. A range of displacements for KN calculations can be specified using the Displacement command from the Analysis menu. Initial and final displacements can be entered, together with the number of displacements required.

Displacement range dialog

Page 92

If a VCG estimate is specified. Traditionally. However if the analysis is being calculated free-to-trim and an estimate of the VCG is known. KN calculations are calculated assuming the VCG at the baseline (K).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Trim dialog The VCG can also be entered (specified from the vertical zero datum). see: Trim on page 142 Also see KN Value Concepts on page 94 KN Values Analysis Environment Options Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Page 93 . the accuracy of the KN calculations (for VCGs in the vicinity of the estimated VCG) may be improved by calculating the GZ curve using the estimated VCG position – this will reduce the error in the trim balance due to the vertical separation of CG and CB because this vertical separation is specified more accurately than simply assuming the VCG at the baseline. the KN values are still presented in the normal manner with the KN values calculated as follows: KN(φ) = GZ(φ) + KG_estimated sin(φ) For information on Trim settings for KN Analysis.

may be calculated from the KN cross curves of stability (at the desired displacement) for any specified KG using the following equation: .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax KN Values Analysis Results KN curves calualated at each heel angle Immersion angles calculated at each displacement KN Value Concepts The righting lever. GZ = KN .KG sin(φ) Page 94 . GZ.

select Heel from the Analysis menu. Limiting KG Settings The initial conditions required for Limiting KG analysis are: Displacement from the Analysis menu. are extremely sensitive to the heel angle intervals that have been chosen. it is essential that the same heel angle intervals are used and that the free-totrim options and CG are the same. GZ curves are calculated for various KG values. For information on Trim settings for Limiting KG Analysis. the selected criteria are evaluated to determine whether the CG may be raised or must be lowered. When comparing the results of a limiting KG analysis to that of a Large Angle Stability analysis. notably angle of maximum GZ. To set the range of angles. select range for calculation of GZ curves Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu The range of displacements to be used is set in the same way as they are set in the KN analysis. select range for analysis Heel from the Analysis menu. The heel angles used may differ from those used in the Large Angle Stability and KN analyses. After each cycle. Some criteria. See Large Angle Stability on page 80 for further details.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax M Z G B’ B N K Note: KN values can also be referred to as “Cross curves of stability”. Choosing Limiting KG Select Limiting KG from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. Limiting KG Limiting KG analysis allows you to analyse the hull at a range of displacements to determine the highest value of KG that satisfies the selected stability criteria. see: Trim on page 142 Page 95 .

(However this will cause some loss of accuracy. As well as the limiting KG. you may wish to use a smaller number of heel angles than for the Large Angle Stability calculations. so if there is any form of asymmetry. Limiting KG Environment Options Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Criteria Limiting KG Results Limiting KG analysis results are Limiting KG values. However. Limiting KG vs displacement graph The Limiting KG value is measured from the baseline.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note: Since Limiting KG can be quite a time consuming analysis. Criteria are only evaluated on the positive side of the GZ curve.) Limiting KG calculations will be significantly faster if the trim is fixed. which is not necessarily the same as the zero point. it may be necessary to run the analysis heeling the vessel to both starboard and port (this can be done automatically in the Batch Analysis). for each displacement and the limiting criterion. The Limiting KG analysis also checks that any selected equilibrium based criteria are passed at each VCG that it tries. draft amidships. Page 96 . you must still have at least one Large Angle Stability criterion selected. the minimum GM. trim and centre of gravity are given in the results table.

If any of the criteria fail. Page 97 . this can be done in the Batch Analysis. Some criteria may depend on the vessel displacement and or vessel‟s VCG. If you require the limiting KG for each criterion individually or wish to perform a Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analysis at each of the displacements and the corresponding limiting KG.1mm. If this tolerance is not achieved in a certain number of iterations. If the criteria pass. run a large angle stability analysis and check the selected criteria. Also see: Convergence Error on page 146 in the Analysis Settings section. the correct values of displacement and VCG will be used in the evaluation of these criteria. Hydromax will start with a set start KG value (e.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax After a Limiting KG analysis has completed. However. the heeling arm will remain constant for all displacements (where it is perhaps desired that the heeling arm should vary with displacement. In this case. the results in the Criteria results table display “Not Analysed”. rather than the heeling arm is constant). Limiting KG Concepts Hydromax will iterate to a KG value that just passes all criteria you have specified in the criteria dialog. Where these values are explicit in the criterion‟s definition in Hydromax. this is because they do not necessarily refer to the final KG and would be misleading. Hydromax will lower the KG and try again. Hydromax will raise the KG value and try to make the criteria fail. Hydromax will move on to the next displacement.g. Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria see Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. problems can arise if the criterion is only available in its generic form – most commonly heeling arm criteria where the heeling arm is specified simply as a lever and not as a moment. 1 meter). For example in the case where the heeling moment. since the heeling arm is not related to the vessel displacement in its definition within Hydromax. Hydromax will continue doing this until the limiting KG value has been iterated to within 0.

In this case. this can be specified below (if the vessel is symmetrical and initially upright. Hydromax must have at least one criterion that will improve by reducing the VCG. Hydromax assumes that raising the VCG will make criteria more likely to fail and that reducing the VCG will make the criteria more likely to pass. This is used to compute required TCG. this should be zero). The second method was available in older versions of Hydromax and it is the first method that provides the additional functionality: 1. 2. however the specified displacement and CG corresponds to that of the intact vessel with damaged tanks empty. Note that we are only concerned about the tanks that will be damaged and that initially contain cargo or ballast. Example calculations It is probably simplest to explain this functionality by means of an example. this is because when they are damaged the ballast or cargo is assumed to be totally lost from the vessel.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax When performing a Limiting KG analysis. If this method is selected Hydromax will look at the mass and CG of cargo or ballast in tanks which will be damaged during the analysis. it is often required to specify a required TCG. Hydromax assumes that damaged tanks lose all liquid cargo or ballast that they may have been carrying and their buoyancy is lost from the vessel – analysis is done by the lost buoyancy method rather than the added mass method. Hydromax will evaluate any equilibriumbased criteria that are selected for testing and act accordingly. Note that all results and input data will be assumed to be for the intact vessel. Current loadcase specifies initial loading of damaged tanks: This means that the currently selected Loadcase will be used to define the volume of cargo or ballast in tanks before damage is applied.) Two methods of specifying the required TCG are possible. Hydromax may have difficulty in finding a true limiting KG and specify convergence errors. For Limiting KG calculations for a damaged vessel where some of the damaged tanks were initially non-empty. the intact vessel is upright (zero heel). This is not necessarily the case for equilibrium-based criteria such as freeboard requirements or for GZ-based criteria such as Angle of maximum GZ. this is not seen as an additional mass because damage is computed by the lost buoyancy method. The tanks would generally provide a transverse moment that must be balanced by the mass of the vessel. This functionality has been in Hydromax for many years. i. Page 98 .e. If the vessel has an off-centre intact TCG. That is the specified displacement will be that of the intact vessel and that the resulting LCG. Limiting KG for damage conditions with initially loaded tanks The set up of the Limiting KG analysis parameters has been modified to facilitate setting up the required TCG when calculating the Limiting KG for a damaged vessel where liquid cargo tanks initially carrying cargo or ballast water are damaged. TCG and KG will also be for the intact vessel. However. The second option is for the used to specify the required TCG directly. (Although seawater enters these damaged areas. if only these types of criteria are selected. This is because under most circumstances. which must therefore be offset. This is because to perform a sensible search. at least one GZbased criterion must also be selected. the mass and CG of the intact vessel after deducting the masses of cargo or ballast in any tanks that will be damaged.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The following sample calculations demonstrate how the new Limiting KG options may be used. This is done by defining a loadcase and switching to the intact mode to specify the tank filling levels. the specified TCG is zero: Page 99 .25m by the stern. We wish to find the maximum VCG that the intact vessel may have in order to pass the selected stability criteria. Initial tank loadings First we need to define how much cargo is in the tanks that will be damaged. In this case we shall use free to trim. Importantly we shall also specify that the current loadcase should be used to determine the required TCG and because the vessel is symmetrical. Use a loadcase to specify the initial quantities of fluids in tanks Setting the Displacements Secondly we need to define the displacement range we wish to calculate the Limiting KG for. This is done in the Displacements dialog: Displacement dialog Setting the Trim options We now need to specify the trim options we wish to use. but with an initial vessel trim of 0. A vessel with a port-side tank that are initially full will have this tank damaged. Here we have specified that the tank is 80% full before the damage is applied.

In this case large port-side tanks are to be damaged. We also need to determine which way we should heel the vessel and in doubt should try heeling the vessel in both directions to see which will give the worst result.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Trim and TCG specification Running the Analysis We now need to select the damage case to be evaluated. these are filled significantly above the waterline so loss of ballast from these tanks will cause a list to Starboard. It must be remembered that these are KG results not VCG so when checking the VCG must be calculated.845mm Page 100 . the stability criteria that need to be passed and a suitable range of heel angles to be computed to evaluate the criteria. Results from Limiting KG analysis Limiting KG results Validation of results The results can be validated by completing a Large Angle Stability analysis with the specified displacement and CG. so the analysis should be done in this direction. In this case the baseline (K) is at – 356.

Page 101 . it can be seen that (as expected) the stability criterion is passed with a very small margin.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Model baseline Computed VCG values We can now set up a loadcase for one of the displacements. Remember that these are the intact vessel displacement and CG: Loadcase to check calculated Limiting KG When the analysis is run.

For information on Trim settings for Floodable Length Analysis. either initial trim or specified LCG) Displacement. The analysis is always carried out free-to-trim. but the centre of gravity can either be specified directly in the Trim dialog or it is computed from the specified initial trim. The VCG must also be specified since the Floodable length analysis is very sensitive to accurate trim calculations. Page 102 . the permeability is applied over the entire length of the vessel and is also applied to the free-surface when calculating the reduction of waterplane area and inertia. select range Bulkhead location (if applicable) 1. Traditionally the criterion of margin line immersion is used to compute the Floodable Length curve. The range of displacements to be used is set in the same way as they are set in the KN and Limiting KG analyses. The permeability dialog is used to specify the permeabilities to be used for the Floodable Length analysis. This means that the vertical separation of CG and CB is accounted for in the trim balance. select range and specify VCG Permeability.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Criterion is passed with a small margin Floodable Length The Floodable Length analysis allows you to calculate the longitudinal distribution of maximum length of compartments that can be flooded with the vessel still passing specified equilibrium criteria. Floodable Length Analysis Settings The initial conditions required for Floodable Length analysis are: Trim (free-to-trim. see: Trim on page 142. The results are presented as the maximum length of compartment plotted (or tabulated) against the longitudinal position of the compartment‟s centre. The Floodable Length may be computed for a range of displacements and compartment permeabilities. Choosing Floodable Length  Select Floodable Length from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

The tabulated data is linearly interpolated from the graphical data. The Intact condition is automatically selected and the Damage toolbar is disabled Criteria from the Analysis menu. select which criteria should be evaluated Criteria must be specified from the analysis menu.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax This permeability is unrelated to the permeability when defining compartments and is only used for floodable length calculations. Hydromax will treat the vessel sinking or the trim exceeding +/-89º as a criterion failure. (The raw graph data can be accessed by double clicking the graph. The vessel profile (centreline buttock) may also be displayed. Page 103 . Floodable Length results The results of the analysis are given in tabulated format at the stations defined in the Maxsurf Design Grid as well as graphical format. Note that internally. All compartment standards up to the maximum specified will be plotted. Floodable Length Environment Options Density Wave Form (if any) Damage: no damage case may be selected as this is automatically defined by the analysis. These are used to compute the Floodable Lengths.) There are several graph plot options available in the Data | Data format dialog (when the floodable length graph is topmost).

Floodable Length Concepts The analysis is performed by defining a flooded compartment. The graph updates in real time as you adjust the bulkhead locations so once you have calculated the floodable lengths. you can quickly adjust the bulkhead locations so that the vessel meets the required compartment standard. If the analysis is unable to find a condition where the vessel passes the selected criteria. with the centre of the compartment at a section under investigation. This process may be visualised by turning on the display of the Hydromax sections. Vessel profile (shown in light grey) Floodable Length Bulkheads locations are specified in a table in the Input window. The vessel sinking or the criteria failing in the intact condition could cause this. the following dialog will be displayed. Plot the different compartment standards up to a specified maximum value.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Floodable lengths graph options: Fix the y-axis so that it is the same scale as the x-axis. The length of this flooded compartment is increased section-by-section until one of the criteria is failed. Page 104 . The compartment is then moved progressively forward along the vessel.

it is recommended that a minimum of 100 sections be used for most situations. two extra columns appear in the Loadcase window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note: Speed versus Accuracy The analysis will be both considerably more accurate and slower with a larger number of sections in the Hydromax model. allowable shears and moments from Input window Page 105 . See the Loadcase Longitudinally Distributed Loads section on page 45 for more details. The analysis can be carried out in flat water or in a specified waveform. These are used to specify the longitudinal extents of the load. Choosing Longitudinal Strength Select Longitudinal Strength from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. Longitudinal Strength Settings The initial conditions required for Longitudinal Strength analysis are: Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window Distributed loads using the Loadcase window When the Longitudinal Strength analysis mode is selected. The speed of the analysis can be increased quite considerably by increasing the allowable tolerances in the Edit | Preferences dialog. A trapezium shaped distributed load is derived from the centre and fore and aft extents of the load. Longitudinal Strength Longitudinal Strength lets you determine the bending moments and shear forces created in the hull due to the loads applied in the Loadcase window. Longitudinal Strength Environment Options Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Grounding (if any) Criteria.

Name of Curve Mass Buoyancy Grounding Damage/NBV Net Load Shear Description Vessel mass / unit length Buoyancy distribution / unit length = immersed cross sectional area * density. allowable shear forces and bending moments are overlayed on the graph. are given positive values. Grounding reaction Loas buoyancy due to damaged tanks and compartments and Non-Byoyant Volumes (NBV) Mass + Buoyancy + Grounding + Damage (and NBV) x Shear Force = NetLoad ( x)dx AftSt Page 106 . If defined. Upward acting forces such as buoyancy and grounding reactions are given negative values. the net load. such as normal masses in the loadcase or lost buoyancy due to damage. Downward acting masses. buoyancy. Longitudinal Strength Results The output from the longitudinal strength calculations is a graph of mass. Damaged tanks and compartments reduce the buoyancy. damage and non-buoyant volumes and grounding loads. shear force and bending moment along the length of the hull are computed. From these.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note that Hydromax will always use the fluid simulation method when performing a longitudinal strength analysis. For more information on how Hydromax can take fluids in tanks into account see Fluids Analysis Methods on page 148.

Choosing Tank Calibrations Select Tank Calibrations from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. Also see: Page 107 . This data is also displayed in the “Long. Strength” tab in the Results window. Without this. any point loads in the loadcase will be applied as a load evenly distributed 100mm either side of the position of the load. at a range of capacities. the longitudinal strength table will be empty. alternatively double-clicking in the graph will give you all the data as plotted. Tank Calibration Input Tank definitions and boundaries Permeability Fluid type The above data are specified in the Compartment and Sounding Pipes definition tables. Tank Calibrations Tank Calibration allows you to determine the properties of the tanks you have defined in the Compartment window. You can display this table by choosing Longitudinal Strength from the Results sub-menu under the Window menu. Tanks are taken into account as distributed loads as well based on their mass distribution that is calculated from the tank sections.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Moment Bending Moment = Allowable shear and moment x ShearForce( x)dx AftSt Allowable shear and bending moments as specified in the input Modulus table. Note Make sure you have defined sections in your model in Maxsurf. Note: For the purposes of strength calculations.

they are shown in grey.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Relative Density of Tank Fluids on page 59 Tank Calibration Settings Trim range. If Compartments or Non-buoyant volumes have also been calibrated. angle or trim measurement Heel angle range Which items to be calibrated: Analysis | Calibration options dialog Analysis | Calibration options dialog: Compartments and Non-buoyant volumes may be calibrated if desired Tank Calibration Environment Options Calibration intervals – see Sounding Pipes Tank Calibration Results If a range of heel (and / or trim) angles have been defined. you may select which are displayed in the results table and graph using the Results toolbar. You may chose which columns are displayed using the Data Format dialog: Page 108 .

the wetted surface area of the tank and the free-surface area. Tank calibration calculations A number of data are calculated for the tanks.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax In the Window | Graphs menu each tank can be selected for display in the Graph window. These include the tank inertias about their centre of gravity. Page 109 . For more information see Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference.

Page 110 . will exacerbate this phenomenon): Figure a Zero trim Figure b Trim by bow. Sounding pipes and tank calibration results If the vessel is trimmed. Here all tank filling levels will have a valid sounding. nearempty tank Figure c Trim by bow. The inertias are in fact “volume inertias” in that they are not multiplied by the density of the fluid in the tank. there are ranges of tank volumes that will show the same sounding/ullage. (The same effect can occur if the sounding pipe does not reach the lowest or highest point in the tank – remember that this can change as the vessel trims. with the vessel at zero trim. Here there will be a range of tank filling levels which all show zero sounding. Figure b shows the vessel with (bow down) trim and a small amount of fluid in the tank. These points occur when the tank is near empty or near full. the top of the tank is only included when the tank is pressed-full.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The wetted surface area of the tank includes only that part of the tank that is wet by the fluid in it at the corresponding sounding level. near-full tank Figure a shows a sounding pipe that extends the whole height of the tank. The following notation is used: x longitudinal-axis y transverse-axis z vertical axis Calculation of tank inertias. which is effectively what is happening in the figures below). see below (increasing the trim. where M and dm indicate an integration over the volume of fluid in the tank.

1%. 99. only – {100%} In automatic mode the increments along the sounding pipe are chosen depending on the height of the tank to give approximately 20 soundings. 5%. 85%. the sounding pipe is in the middle of the tank and extends from the bottom to the top of the tank. not the vertical step of the tank level). Finally a “Fredyn” sounding list may be generated. … .0m). there are four results which all have a sounding of 1. … . type “A”. In the blue results.0m but different capacities – the fluid levels are all above the top of the sounding pipe. Page 111 .9%. Here there will be a range of tank filling levels that all show maximum sounding. 99. User defined Fredyn – {0%.9%. 100%} Max. 10%. 90%. if the 1% level does not intersect the sounding pipe.1%. 100%} of the full capacity of the tank.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Figure c shows the vessel with the same trim. 98% and 100% full. “Max” or a numerical value in the “Calibration Spacing” column of the Sounding Pipe definition table. this gives intervals of {0%. 95%. 98% and 100% full levels do not intersect the sounding pipe. see below. the last two results are below the bottom of the sounding pipe. These effects will be noted in the tank calibration results if they are extreme enough since Hydromax always adds calibrations at 1%. giving soundings of 0. 5%. The profile view of the tank in the trimmed vessel is shown on the right. 0. Similarly if the 97. if the sounding pipe extends above or below the maximum and minimum fluid levels. To specify the interval. 0. 97. Sounding intervals The sounding intervals for the calibration table may be: Automatic.9%. you will get readings which have the same capacity but different soundings. 95%.0m but different capacities (the last but one calibration point is the fluid remaining in the tank when the sounding is 0. “F”. 85%. Alternatively you may specify a precise sounding step (this is the step along the sounding pipe. In the results out lined in red. 10%. sounding pipe does not cover full range of tank capacities. the maximum sounding will be displayed. the sounding will be given as zero. Tank calibrations for severely trimmed vessels. but with the tank nearly full. In a similar way.9%. 90%.

MARPOL Options dialog (Analysis menu) The MARPOL options dialog allows the user to select the tanks that should be included in the analysis for both MARPOL Regulations. type “Fredyn” in the Calibration Spacing column of the Sounding Pipes Definition table: Specification of Fredyn calibration intervals Note that Compartments and non-buoyant volumes are always calibrated at the calibration intervals required by Fredyn. 90. Fredyn calibration intervals The tank calibrations normally follow regular length intervals along the sounding pipe. Fredyn sounding pipe The tank calibration intervals required by Fredyn are (as a percentage of full capacity) {0. 95.1.0. Regulation 23: Accidental oil outflow performance Define the tanks in the Compartment definition window then choose the MARPOL analysis mode. A common sounding pipe is used for “Fredyn tanks”.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note: Backward compatibility with earlier versions of Hydromax If the model is saved with Fredyn calibration intervals and is loaded into an earlier version of Hydromax.141(54). Regulation 12A: Oil fuel tank protection Resolution MEPC.117(52).0. 5. Seltect the Reolution and tanks to be included in the analysis in the MARPOL options (Analysis menu) dialog (see below). …. all soundings for “Fredyn tanks” use this common sounding pipe. To use these intervals.0. you must change the calibration intervals to Automatic or a positive value otherwise Hydromax will crash during the tank calibration analysis. MARPOL Oil Outflow MARPOL probabilistic oil outflow calculation may be computed according to the following MARPOL regulations: Resolution MEPC.9}.0. 10. If only the 100% full values are required “Max” may be specified for the calibratin spacing. this sounding pipe starts at the vessel zero point and projects vertically upwards. Page 112 . 99.

When you select a Regulation with the radio buttons. MARPOL Tank measurements If the “Update all tank measurements” check-box is ticked. Further each tank has the option for being included in the computation for outflow due to side.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Tank selection for the MARPOL analysis The list of selected tanks is different for both Regulations since Regulation 12A is for fuel tanks and Regulation 23 applies to cargo tanks. the corresponding list of selected tanks will be displayed in the grid.and bottom-damage. The table is in the MARPOL tab of the Results window: Page 113 . it is not possible to guarantee that Hydromax will be 100% accurate in interpreting the measurements as defined in the MARPOL documents. for this reason the user should carefully review the values generated by Hydromax. then Hydromax will attempt to measure the required tank parameters (over-writing any that have previously been manually edited). MARPOL Results and additional Input Because the calculations of the MARPOL analysis are very quick they are done in realtime as input data is edited by the user. Due to the nature of some of the measurements. For this reason the data input and results are combined in one table.

which affects bottomdamage outflow in Regulation 12A. For Regulation 12A. Page 114 . the default being 1000kg/m3. those which cannot are shown in grey. the deadweight is computed as the difference in displacements between the deepest loadline draft and the lightship draft (or may be specified directly). The deepest loadline draft is taken as the DWL draft. Regulation 23 calculates the nominal oil density as the deadweight divided by the total tank capacity. oil outflow due to Side damage and finally oil outflow due to Bottom damage. Furthermore the inert gas overpressure may be specified for Regulation 23. the nominal fuel oil density is specified by the user.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax MARPOL calculations: Results Window The table is split into three parts: main Hull parameters. Parameters that can be edited are shown in black. If a parameter is modified. please refer to the relevant IMO instruments. it is possible to revert back to the Hydromax calculated value or default by typing „H‟ or double clicking: Reverting back to default/calculated parameter values For full definitions of the parameters. Main Hull Parameters Different parameters are shown depending on the Regulation being used. the lightship draft is used to calculate the deadweight for Regulation 23 and the partial draft.

Probabilistic Damage IMO Probabilistic damage Hydromax support for Probabilistic damage according to both IMO MSC.216(82) can be applied to both dry cargo and passenger ships whilst MSC. For tanks which are to be considered for both side.and bottom. These should be carefully checked since these can be difficult for Hydromax to automatically measure in some cases. please refer to the relevant IMO instruments Saving With the MARPOL sheet active.19(58) is applicable to dry cargo vessels only. It is advisable to copy any manually edited data to a spreadsheet or text file if you only want to update the measurements of some tanks. The user-editable tank parameters are the main dimensions which affect the probability of damage.damage. listing first side-damage tanks. the MARPOL data may be saved.hmd file when the design is saved. Page 115 . MSC.19(58) . it is also saved in the main . Note: Hydromax will overwrite user-edited tank parameters! Remember that any data that you change manually will be overwritten by Hydromax if the “Update all tank measurements” option is ticked in the MARPOL options dialog. these values are linked so it is only necessary to edit them in one location.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Main hull parameters required for each Regulation Tank Parameters Calculations are shown further down.216(82) and IMO MSC. then bottomdamage tanks. For full definitions of the parameters.

The vessel‟s attained subdivision index is the sum of the products of the pfactors with their corresponding s-factors. User defines the bulkheads and deck values for single and groups of adjacent zones. The attained subdivision index can then be compared with a required subdivision index to see if the vessel achieves a sufficiently high degree of safety. For each condition. the p-factors Damage window | p Factors table are automatically calculated and displayed as the zone data is modified. Hydromax runs a large angle stability analysis for each combination of loadcase and damage and collates the results to calculate the attained index. User defines the damage zones they wish to consider in the Damage window | Zones table Once 2 and 3 have been completed. The same log file is used for each analysis so it is important to either change the name or copy the file at the end of the analysis if the results are to be kept. When the Zones have been defined the user can then define which tanks are damaged in each zone in the Damage window | Zone damage table. This is then compared with the required index. Flow through – Typical Use-case The following section shows how the probabilistic damage analysis might typically be used.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Probabilistic damage – Principles Essentially the probabilistic damage analysis performs a number of large angle stability analyses and uses the IMO criterion to determine an s-factor that depends on certain parameters of the GZ curve. During the analysis each GZ curve and details on the evaluation of the s-factor may be saved in a log file. The user can then perform the probabilistic damage analysis. It is useful to have this interaction because if the p Factor is too large for a particular zone. A first pass at this can be automatically generated using the Case | Extent of damage command. The GZ curves are calculated for a large number of different damage conditions and several load cases. the user may decide to refine the zone arrangement. Maxsurf model is loaded as normal User defines (first selecting File | New to open the Probabilistic damage data table) other ship data required for the probabilistic damage analysis in the Damage window | Global table. The log file parameters may be specified in the Edit | Preferences dialog: Page 116 . a p-factor can be calculated.

The probabilistic damage input sheets are in the damage window after the normal damage condition sheet.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Probabilistic damage result logging options (Edit | Preferences) Finding the probabilistic damage input sheets. Page 117 .

Settings for Probabilistic damage GZ curve calculation Since the analysis essentially consists of a large number of GZ curve calculations. most of the settings that are applicable to the Large Angle Stability analysis are also applicable to the Probabilistic Damage Analysis. Bring one of the probabilistic damage tables to the front to enable File menu items Probabilistic damage – Inputs In this section we shall look at the input parameters required for the probabilistic damage analysis. For this reason it is also possible to save the probabilistic damage data as a separate file (in a similar way to the other Hydromax input data). ensure that one of the probabilistic damage data sheets in the Damage window is on top. However this is new to version 14.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax A Probabilistic Damage toolbar button is available in the Windows toolbar which will take the user back to the last used probabilistic damage input table: Probabilistic damage – Saving input parameters The probabilistic damage data is saved in the . these data would be lost.1 and if the file were read into an earlier version of Hydromax and saved.hmd file. Chose the Probabilistic Damage analysis mode from the pull-down or Analysis menu: Page 118 . To load or save the probabilistic damage data as a separate file.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Selecting Probabilistic Damage anlysis mode

Once you have selected the probabilistic damage analysis mode, you can define the heel angle range and trim settings to be used as well as any environmental parameters such as waveform (as well as the fluid analysis method to be used). During probabilistic damage analysis, it is possible to check the vessel heeling to both port and starboard. This is useful if the tanks contain ballast or cargo and it is uncertain in which direction the vessel will list when damaged (or indeed the vessel may list to different directions depending on the loadcase and damage). Hydromax will calculate the GZ curve in both directions and, if the criteria can be evaluated in both directions, the lowest s-factor will be taken. If the criteria can only be evaluated in one direction, then this value for the s-factor will be taken. It is recommended to evaluate at least one negative heel angle and the direction of heel should correspond to the side of the vessel that is being damaged (see below):

Page 119

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Heel angle specification (as per Large Angle Stability)

Use either fixed trim or free to trim to loadcase. s-factor calculation

The s-factors are calculated by stability criteria. The Probailistic damage analysis has its own set of criteria (though the same parent criteria are also available in the large angle stability analysis criteria). When the analysis mode has been set to Proababilistic Damage, you will see the criteria that are used for this analysis. The number of parent criteria is reduced to only those which can calculate the s-factor. Also some “Default” criteria are supplied, you can add or modify these should you so desire. When running the analysis, Hydromax will look at the probabilistic criteria that have been selected and warn you if there are any problems.

Page 120

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Probabilistic Damage Criteria Manager with Parent and Default criteria

The following rules should be observed when defining the probabilistic damage criteria:
As with the normal criteria manager, changes made to the parent (bold) criteria are not saved. If you need to modify any of the criteria you should make your own copies of the parent criteria A set of Default criteria are provided – these can be modified and changes will be saved. Only one criterion should be selected and it should correspond to the IMO Resolution being used. (Strictly, you may have up to one of each MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) criteria selected and Hydromax will automatically use the appropriate one – according to the selected Resolution in the Global sheet – but for clarity, it is probably best practive to just have a single criterion selected.) The criteria should always be selected for Damage analysis. Hydromax will automatically update some of the criteria parameters according to corresponding parameters in the probabilistic damage setup. However it is still good practice to review criteria parameters before starting the analysis. This is particularly true for the MSC.216(82) Resolution where the vessel type and heeling moments must be defined correctly. The criteria window can be closed with either of the close buttons.

For further information on how the s-factors are calculated and the different parameters, please refer to the Criteria Help section for the appropriate criteria (and heeling arms).
Main parameters and calculation of required subdivision index

The other parameters required for the probabilistic damage analysis are defined in the last four tables in the Damage window:

Page 121

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Additional tables in the Damage window define the remaining Probabilistic damage input data

Depending on the selected IMO Resolution, different rows and columns will be displayed in the tables; both MSC.216(82) and MSC.19(58) are provided, A.265 VIII is not included. Tool tips have been added to provide a more detailed explanation of the input parameters and also the options available.

Tool tips for Global data sheet Global table

This table is used to define the main parameters for the probabilistic damage anlysis as well as provide some intermediate calculations. Input data are shown in black whilst results are shown in grey. Depending on the Resolution and vessel type, some rows may be hidden.

Page 122

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Global table – MSC.216(82) Dry Cargo vessel and Passenger vessel

Page 123

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Global table – MSC.19(58) Dry Cargo

Row Resolution -MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) Deepest subdivision draft (summer loadline) Loadcase Partial subdivision draft Loadcase Light service draft Loadcase Type -- Cargo or Passenger Lifeboat capacity N_1 Permitted max. num. of persons in excess of N_1: N_2 max. moulded breadth at or below deepest subdivision draft: B max. number of adjacent zones to consider min. p-Factor of damage to consider
Page 124

Description IMO Resolution to be used.

Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the deepest subdivision draft. Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the partial subdivision draft. Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the light subdivision draft. not required for MSC.19(58). Vessle type. not required for MSC.19(58). Number of persons for whom lifeboats are provided. required for MSC.216(82), pax. Vessel only. Number of persons inclusing officers and crew that the vessel is permitted to carry in excess of N_1. required for MSC.216(82), pax. Vessel only. Parameter not currently used.

Specifies the upper limit of the number of adjacent zones that should be damaged. If you wish to limit the analysis by p-factor only, then specify the number of zones here (see min p-factor below). Specifies the minimum p-factor for which an analysis should be performed. The maximum a condition can contribute to the

If you wish the analysis to be purely limited by the number of adjacent zones (see above) then specify a small negative value. This can speed up the analysis. vertical extent of damage Damaged side -Starboard or Port Zone 1 located at bow or stern? Longitudinal Zone definition attained index is the p-factor. but the option to start from the bow is also allowed in Hydromax The next table (Zones) allows for the definition of the longitudinal damage zones.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax max. this can speed up the analysis. Fore and aft extents of the zone boundaries are input by the user and the length and centre of the zone is automatically calculated. It is normal to begin the Zone numbering at the stern. If desired the vertical extent of damage (when automatically generating the zone damage) can be limited. as are the zone names. the boundaries of adjacent zones are automatically updated if required. The heel direction in the Heel setup should correspond to the side of the vessel being damaged. Specifies which side of the vessel will be damaged (when automatically generating the zone damage). The subdivision length is taken as the limits of the length defined by the zones. If desired the vertical extent of damage (when automatically generating the zone damage) can be limited. This will ensure that conditions with zero p-factor will still be evaluated. use Edit | Add or Delete (or Ctrl+A or Del key. As for other similar tables. If the vessel trim exceeds this value. The extent of damage is assumed to go all the way to the centreline but you may specify which side of the vessel is damaged. trim angle to consider Limit vertical extent of damage? max. with a number of complete rows selected) to add or delete zones. then the s-factor will be taken as zero (irrespective of the GZ curve). Damage zones defined by fwd and aft boundaries Zones may be shown in the drawing views (this display option is only available in Probabilistic Damage analysis mode): Page 125 . Conditions whose pfactor is below this minimum will not be evaluated. If the the p-factor is very small the contribution to the attained index will be negligible and there is little point in carrying out the analysis.

This will help the user to determine the maximum number of adjacent zones that should be analysed. the probability of damaging a longitudinal zone or group of adjacent zones is calculated as well as the cumulative probability. The last column shows whether a particular condition will be tested (if the p-factor is sufficiently large and the maximum number of adjacent zones is not exceeded). Page 126 . This can easily be done by specifying the maximum number of adjacent zones as the number of zones defined. The columns displayed depends on the choice of Resolution: MSC.19(58) made in the Global table. P-Factors From the damage zone calculations.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Probabilistic damage zones (stbd. side damage) shown in pink. All combinations of adjacent zones are calculated at this point. In practice. it probably makes more sense to limit the analysis by specifying a desired minimum p-factor rather than a number of adjacent zones.216(82) or MSC. A subtotal for the pfactor for a given number of adjacent zones is given as well as a cumulative to total for all the p-factors.

the inner limit being at a distance side-shell offset minus b from the centreline. measured from the side-shell. The sum of all r-factors should be unity (a check is provided). The side-shell offset value defaults to the maximum halfbeam of the vessel. but also for groups of adjacent zones. Note that there is one extra r-factor than the number of bulkheads – this represents the probability of damaging to the centerline. A column is provided for the user to specify the side-shell offset (from the centerline) and this is used only to draw the transverse extents of the damage zone. there is a special way of calculating the b-value and this needs to be done for each set of adjacent zones. I have followed IMO notation by specifying the penetration depth from the side-shell (rather than specifying the offset from the centerline). it is also possible to define sub-zones due to longitudinal bulkheads (transverse subdivision) and decks (vertical subdivision). If no b-values are specified.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax p-factor calculations for individual and groups of zones Sub zones due to transverse and vertical subdivision As well as the main longitudinal subdivision. the zone will be damaged up to (but not across) the centreline. Page 127 . This is because where the side-shell or bulkhead is not parallel to the centerline. The b-values are defined not only for each individual zone. The r-factors are then calculated for each of the b-values that have been defined. Transverse sub-zone definition and R-Factors Transverse sub-zone definition allows the user to limit the damage penetration to a certain distance into the vessel towards the centerline.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Longitudinal bulkhead definition and corresponding r-factors Page 128 .

The currently selected zone or sub-zone is shown in bold as well as any damage for that zone. Clicking in a zone or sub-zone in the table highlights the zone graphically Page 129 . selected zone shown in bold. This can also be seen in rendered view to quite effectively visualize the damage.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Visualisation of zones and sub-zones: sub-zones shown dashed.

Thus we introduce the concept of the currently selected Loadcase for the displayed vfactors. Loadcase for v-factor calculations is selected by clicking on the desired loadcase in the Global table. The corresponding v-factors are calculated. Note that during the full probabilistic damage analysis. The loadcase for v-factor calculations is selected by clicking on the desired loadcase in the Global table.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Vertical sub-zone definition and V-Factors Similarly decks may be defined to create vertical subdivision of the zones. but these also depend on the draft of the vessel. Page 130 . the v-factors will be automatically recalculated for the loadcase under consideration.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Deck definition and corresponding v-factors Page 131 .

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Zone damage The zone damage sheet specifies which tanks are damaged for a given zone. Automatic definition of damage for each zone Additionally the user may automatically generate damage cases for the Zone damage that has been defined damage configurations within the maximum number of adjacent zones range and above the minimum p-factor will be added. this can be modified by the user should this prove to be necessary (or it can be defined from scratch by the user). The Damage window must be on top for this command to work. The “Zone damage” tab of the Damage window must be on top to enable this command. Damage cases will be added up to the maximum number of adjacent zones specified in the Global tab. Page 132 . This stage is not required for the probabilistic analysis. Definition of whats damaged in each zone Once the zones are defined the user can select the Case | Extent of damage command and this will automatically generate the zone damage according to which tanks lie within the zone boundaries. Once the automatic damage is defined. if the pfactor exceeds the minimum values specified (again in the Global tab). but has been added for convenience should the user wish to manually run large angle stability analyses for the same damage cases. From this Hydromax can work out what should be damaged for any combination of adjacent damaged zones.

The zone is selected by clicking in the corresponding column of the Zone Damage table. Page 133 . but those of the currently selected zone.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Automatic creation of damage cases using the damage defined for each zone Visualization of zone damage When in Probabilistic damage analysis mode the damaged tanks and compartments displayed are not those of the current damage case.

the permeabilities are the same as the damage permeabilities given in the Compartment Definition table.216(82) Regulation 7-3. Page 134 . but they are not updated if they are then changed in the Compartment definition window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Zone damage visualisation Probabilistic damage permeabilities It is possible to define different permeabilities to be used for tanks and compartments for the different load conditions – as required for “cargo compartments” in MSC. By default.2: MSC.216(82) Regulation 7-3. When you generate new probabilistic damage data.2 Thess values are defined in the Permeabilities table in the Probabilistic Damage window. but these can be overridden (for the probabilistic damage analysis only) for each draft if desired. the permeability values are copied from the Compartment definition.

the permeability used for any damaged tanks is shown: Probabilistic damage – Analysis Once the analysis parameter data has been defined. The following checks are made: Page 135 . Hydromax will make several checks to see if the analysis parameters have been correctly set up.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax In the log file. it is worth checking that the heel direction (Analysis | Heel) is correct and also check that the s-factor calculation parameters are corerect (Analysis | Criteria) Pre-run checks When trying to run the probabilistic damage analysis. These are not exhaustive tests but should pick up critical errors.

216(82) is being used) That the correct s-factor criterion has been selected. The required index is also shown as well as pass/fail status. Note that only one criterion may be selected. this is reported and the s-factor given as zero.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax That loadcases that have been specified exist That the vessel type is correct in the criteria (if MSC. Should the vessel sink. Basic data pertinent to calculation of the s-factor is also presented as well as a total Attained subdivision index at the bottom of the table. Page 136 . excessive trim occur or the large angle stability analysis fail to converge. If Hydromax finds no criteria selected but a suitable one is available (but unselected) then it will prompt the user to use this one: Analysis Large angle stability analyses are computed for each combination of loadcase and zone damage up to either the specified maximum number of adjacent zones or the minimum specified p-factor.

Hydromax will flash and beep to indicate that the analysis has been completed. If you are not interested in seeing the progress of the analysis. Hydromax will redraw the contents of the windows to display the current hull position for each iteration. including all the GZ results and criteria evaluation for each loadcase / damage case combination are logged during the analysis. The start. If you have stopped the analysis. The logfile location is specified in the Preferences dialog: Page 137 . Should the analysis take longer than about 45 seconds. There may be a slight time delay on all of these operations while the current cycle is finished. Calculations may be interrupted at any time by selecting Stop Analysis from the Analysis menu or toolbar. pause and resume functions are also available in the Analysis toolbar: Probabilistic damage Log file All the intermediate results. Hydromax will continue to calculate in the background although its speed will be reduced. The drawing of the vessel at each step of the analysis can be quite time consuming.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Probabilistic analysis results Probabilistic damage – Future developments The probabilistic damage analysis is still under development and new features will be added in subsequent versions of Hydromax. choose Start Analysis from the Analysis menu or toolbar. floating the hull to equilibrium conditions where required. switch to a table window and maximise it to speed up the analysis. Hydromax will step through the parameter ranges specified. You can also switch application by clicking in the window of any background program. you can resume calculation by selecting Resume Analysis from the Analysis Menu or toolbar. Starting and Stopping Analyses To start the analysis.

The aim of the batch processing function is to: Page 138 . You may also choose to perform a Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analysis at the final VCG. Hydromax will run Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses for all combinations of load and damage cases. Limiting KG and KN calculations can be made for each damage condition. For the Limiting KG analysis you may also check the Limiting KG for each criterion individually. There are other options which allow the analysis to be performed heeling to both port and starboard. Further. With a single command.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Probabilistic Damage analysis logging Batch Analysis Batch Analysis Concepts Hydromax has basic batch processing capability.

damage cases. Batch Analysis – Procedures Once the loadcases.: analysis parameters. Before you can perform a Batch Analysis it is recommended that you run a number of Analyses manually to check whether the Model has been defined correctly and all Analysis Settings and Environment conditions have been set correctly. Enable Limiting KG and KN analyses to be performed automatically for all damage cases. criteria and analysis parameters for the required analyses have been set up.e. file name etc. especially where results for all individual criteria are required. Facilitate testing with heel to port and starboard for vessels with asymmetric loading and/or damage conditions (or hulls). Provide all relevant results and the data required to be able to reproduce the runs. the Batch Analysis is started Analysis | Start Batch Analysis Page 139 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Provide the user with a simple and consistent way of carrying out Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses on a large number of load and damage cases. Facilitate export of the data from Hydromax and import into MS Excel for post processing and report generation. Facilitate time consuming Limiting KG analyses. i. key points.

Batch Analysis Settings Analysis parameters such as trim. are set in the normal way for each analysis type included in the Batch analysis. it is advisable not to include the results in the report. At the bottom of the dialog is a check box which allows users to select whether the results of a batch analysis should go to the Report window in Hydromax as well as the batch analysis text file. minimising Hydromax can reduce the time required to perform the calculations. Any criteria that have been set are evaluated at the end of each analysis and the results of these are also output to the text file. only the results of the final analysis will be stored in Hydromax. heel angles etc. For example. For large batch analysis. Warning: Sending the results to the Report can slow down analysis considerably and also consume considerable system resources. the batch analysis will automatically create a Word document. Page 140 . this tab delimited text file may be imported directly into MS Excel for further processing. it is possible that your computer will become very slow to respond and under some circumstances with certain operating systems even cause Hydromax to crash. see Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. Batch Analysis Results Before analysis starts. When the option for Sending the results to Word is selected in the Edit | Preferences dialog. Also see: Reporting on page 155.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Batch analysis runs all combination of loadcases and damage cases.5 m: first select the Large Angle Stability analysis type from the analysis menu set the trim to Fixed trim and 0. if you want the Large Angle Stability to use a fixed trim of 0. Tip: Under most operating systems. The report is stored in memory and if you have insufficient memory. you will be prompted to enter the name and location of the file where Hydromax will write the results of the batch analysis. Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria. This is because time consuming redrawing of the design windows. Once the analysis is complete. graphs and tables is avoided. Because the analyses are simply carried out one after the other.5 m then select Analysis | Batch Analysis Batch Analysis Environment Options (Criteria) Any Analysis Environment Options specified prior to a Batch Analysis will be used during the Batch Analysis. it is not possible to go back to the results for a specific analysis from within Hydromax.

Heel and Draft. or it can match a specified displacement and centre of gravity by varying the heel. Heel angles between 180 and +180 may be specified. trim and draft. For an equilibrium analysis all degrees of freedom are derived from the centre of gravity and Displacement. In the Specified Condition Analysis any combination of the variable pairs may be specified.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Analysis Settings In the previous sections opening and preparing a model in Hydromax was discussed together with descriptions of the different Analysis types. Combinations of both are also possible. The various analysis types and settings can be thought of as setting one variable in each pair to a fixed value and deriving the others from the analysis. This section will describe the following analysis settings: Heel Trim Draft Displacement Specified Conditions Permeability Hydromax will allow specification of only those analysis settings that apply to the currently selected analysis type. because vertical centre of gravity is also important and also because most of the variables are coupled. KN and Limiting KG analyses. Page 141 . there are three degrees of freedom: Trim. The following table is a very simplified representation of the degrees of freedom and their weight counterpart: Degree of Freedom Draft Trim Heel Weight Displacement Longitudinal Centre of Gravity (LCG) Transverse Centre of Gravity (TCG) 1 2 3 In fact it is a rather more complicated situation than that suggested by the table above. In this case the LCB and TCB (and therefore the required LCG and TCG) are calculated from the underwater hullshape at each draft. For example: it can match a specified heel. trim and draft by varying the displacement and centre of gravity. The heel steps must be positive. This way the volume of the displaced hull matches the required mass and the centres of gravity and buoyancy lie one above the other in a vertical line. For example: the Upright Hydrostatics analysis consists of fixing heel and trim and stepping through a series of fixed drafts. heel and draft with the vessel‟s mass and centre of gravity or visa versa. If only one set of steps is required. Hydromax matches the trim. In hydrostatic analysis. Heel The Heel dialog from the analysis menu is used to specify the range of heel angles to be used for Large Angle Stability. simply put 0 in the other steps.

Floodable Length and Tank Calibrations. Hydromax will fit a cubic spline to the GZ curve and use this to interpolate for values between the tested heel angles. This is to allow roll back angle criteria to be evaluated correctly.. the trim may be specified in the Specified Conditions dialog. Note: For the angle of equilibrium to be found (when analysing criteria). Hydromax will not do any curve fitting and linear interpolation will be used. It is good practise to start the heel range at an angle of approximately -30°. loading. key points.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax If there is any asymmetry in the vessel due to either: hull shape. Trim may be specified for Upright Hydrostatics. at say -5 degrees. Trim For most analyses you may specify whether the vessel is free-to-trim or has fixed trim. Note: The heel angles to be used are specified independently for each analysis mode. and there is any doubt as to which will be the worst heel direction. damage. then the analysis should be carried out for both heel to starboard and heel to port to find the most pessimistic condition. It is possible that the GZ at zero heel may be very slightly positive (due to asymmetry or rounding error) for this reason. (For the Specified Condition analysis. it is advisable to test at least one negative heel angle.) Equilibrium and Longitudinal Strength analyses always use a free trimming (and free heeling) analysis so that there is no trimming (or heeling) moment applied to the vessel at the final equilibrium. If any step is greater than 10 deg. to ensure that the equilibrium angle is identified. etc. it is essential that the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope. If all the heel angle intervals are 10 deg or less. Page 142 . KN Analysis Limiting KG. This can be a source of apparent differences in the results from the different analyses. Select Trim in the Analysis menu to bring up the Trim dialog. Large Angle Stability.

for each displacement. specified initial trim. Free to trim to loadcase – the analysis trims the vessel to the CG specified in the loadcase. This applies to all analyses that carry out a large angle stability-type analysis (Large Angle Stability. the LCB of the intact vessel at the specified trim and zero heel is computed. In the case of the Limiting KG analysis. Free to trim to specified CG – this is again free-to-trim but the CG is specified in the dialog. Calculations at each heel angle of the large angle stability analysis are then done free-to-trim using the derived LCG and VCG. Equilibrium. for each displacement. The analysis is carried out with the specified fixed trim. but the LCG will be different. Specification of different trim options is dependent on the type of analysis currently selected. Limiting KG. the vessel is not free-totrim as it heels. 3. Probabilistic Damage. all three components of the CG need to be know. This option is available for all analyses that have a loadcase: Large Angle Stability. this analysis will tend to overestimate ship stability properties such as GZ. Longitudinal Strength. the VCG is being found by the analysis.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Essentially there are three options for trim: 1. Thus. intact vessel trim will be the same. Although considerably faster. Fixed trim (KN and Limiting KG analyses only). intact vessel floats at a specified trim. the upright. heel is not considered thus TCG cannot be specified. so cannot be specified. KN. Page 143 . The LCG is calculated using this value and the VCG. Fixed trim – the analysis is carried out at a fixed. Floodable Length. KN. Probabilistic Damage) as well as Upright Hydrostatics and Tank Calibrations 2. Free-to-trim using a specified initial trim value Using this method. This is for when a range of displacements is used for the analysis: Limiting KG. The TCG and VCG are specified directly. This it is possible to specify the LCG either directly or so that the upright. For the Floodable Length analysis. In this case.

for each displacement. Page 144 .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Free-to-trim to a specified LCG value With this method. TCG value The TCG option allows you to specify an off-centreline centre of gravity for Limiting KG and KN calculations. The TCG can be either specified directly or calculated from the tank loadings defined in the current loadcase. the VCG is needed to provide an accurate balance of the trimming moment. because the analysis is very sensitive to trim. Draft The draft dialog is used to specify the range of drafts to be used for the Upright hydrostatics analysis. It will also be used to improve the accuracy of the KN results. the VCG will only have an effect if the analysis is free-to-trim. (As the trim angle increases the longitudinal movement of the centre of gravity due to its vertical position becomes more important. which are always calculated free-to-trim. Also. This is for consistency with the lost buoyancy analysis method: the buoyancy contribution of damaged tanks is removed from the model. but the upright vessel trim will be different. so to be consistent. For Floodable Length calculations. a specified constant LCG is maintained for each displacement. may be specified. the VCG will be used to calculate the LCG if an initial trim value is specified. This is especially useful when evaluating the Limiting KG of a damaged vessel that had cargo or ballast in tanks which are subsequently damaged. the actual VCG is used and the VCG input field will state “not applicable”. Current Loadcase specifies initial loading of damaged tanks (los mass during analysis) Finally. there is an option to automatically adjust the displacement and LCG of the vessel so that liquid cargo of damaged tanks is removed from the model. It will be used to determine the LCG if an initial trim value is specified. Thus. VCG for trim balance The VCG. the LCG will be the same. This LCG is then used to compute the free-to-trim vessel orientation at each heel angle as the large angle stability analysis is performed. any liquid cargo should also be removed from the model. measured from the vertical zero datum (not necessarily KG). For KN analysis. for the Limiting KG analysis.) In the case of the Limiting KG analysis.

Displacement The displacement dialog is used to specify the range of displacements to be used for the KN. The compartment. This permeability is unrelated to compartment. The Permeability dialog is used to specify the permeabilities to be used for the Floodable Length analysis. See Specified Conditions on page 90. Individual Permeability of Tanks and Compartments The individual permeability of each compartment (or tank) is specified in the Compartment definition table. The last set of permeabilities used will be recalled from the registry when Hydromax is started. and is specified in terms of KG – i. Permeability The Permeabilities are set in a table in the Permeability dialog. the permeability is applied over the entire length of the vessel. from the baseline. Page 145 . The permeabilities may be sorted by double clicking on the permeability column heading. Limiting KG and Floodable Length calculations.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax The VCG specified in the draft dialog is used for the calculation of upright stability characteristics such as GMt only.e. Specified Conditions The specified conditions analysis setting is only available for the specified condition analysis. which is not necessarily the vertical zero datum. and/or calculating the weights of fluids in tanks in the loadcase. tank or non-buoyant volume permeability and is only used for floodable length calculations. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or delete rows from the table. tank and non-buoyant volume permeabilities are used when calculating the effects of damage.

Also convergence may be poor if the trim angle approaches 90 . The specified displacement and the actual displacement at the current iteration are provided for information. Acceptable tolerances should always be greater than Ideal tolerances.00001% and 0. The warning is also not shown when accessing Hydromax from a VBA macro using the Automation interface Page 146 .001% to 1. If convergence to within the acceptable error has not been achieved. Convergence Error Hydromax will attempt to solve most analysis to within the ideal tolerance. but the acceptable error has been achieved.0%. One of the most common causes of non-convergence is if the specified displacement exceeds the volume of the completely submerged vessel and it sinks. If Hydromax thinks that it is likely that the model has sunk (waterplane area is zero at the current condition) the following dialog will be displayed.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Also see: Modelling Compartments on page 51 Tolerances In the Edit | Preferences dialog. Hydromax will continue. instead the warning is written in the batch file. Acceptable tolerances can range from 0.1% (1 gram in 10 tonnes of displacement). If this is not achieved within a certain number of iterations. This defines the tolerances that Hydromax uses to determine when to finish iteration during Large Angle Stability Equilibrium analysis Specified conditions KN calculations Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength Ideal tolerances can range between 0. Note This warning is not displayed during batch analysis. Hydromax will display a warning. calculation tolerances can be set.

producing a highly non-linear waterplane area vs. Analysis Environment Options The analysis can be performed in different environments. heel angle curve. Note: There are occasions when convergence will not necessarily occur within the maximum allowable number of iterations. this limit is increased to +/-89º. If you choose to continue. but will allow you the option of continuing the search. The analysis will also fail to converge if the trim becomes excessive. If the search is unsuccessful after a reasonable period of time. If Hydromax fails to converge it will give you a warning. Other causes of non-convergence can be non-linear moment to trim vs. you can interrupt Hydromax by pausing the analysis. draft plot. Hydromax will search for the equilibrium position indefinitely. in the case of the Floodable Length analysis. All analyses other than Floodable Length will fail if the trim exceeds +/-45º.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax If there is a convergence problem. this section describes the analysis environment options available in Hydromax in more detail: Page 147 . This problem can sometimes occur if the specified displacement is extremely small and the vessel has a large flat bottom. which appears not to be due to sinking. then the following dialog will be displayed. trim angle curve or moment to heel vs.

You may set different limits for each of the different free surface moment types other than “User Specified”. 3. if the filling level is less than or equal to the lower limit or the filling level is greater than or equal to the upper limit.e. but the code provides some flexibility in interpretation for the lower limit.2 Free surface effects should be considered whenever the filling level in a tank is less than 98% of full condition. (see IMO IS Code) Page 148 . It is possible to specify the range of filling levels for which free surface moments should be applied in the loadcase. (see IMO IS Code) 3.10 The usual remainder of liquids in empty tanks need not be taken into account in calculating the corrections. This requires that a nominal minimum displacement be specified. provided that the total of such residual liquids does not constitute a significant free surface effect. This is applicable to the “IMO” free surface moment type only. Selecting Fluids in the Analysis menu opens the Fluids Analysis dialog. due to the free surface moment is less than a specified amount.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Fluids Analysis Methods Density Waveform Grounding Stability Criteria Damage Fluids Analysis Methods Hydromax allows you to specify two different ways of simulating any fluids contained in tanks or compartments.i. The upper limit is clearly stated by IMO as 98%. i. filling level is 98% or above. the free surface moment will be zero.3. Free surface effects need not be considered where a tank is nominally full . the FSM is applied if the filling level is within the exclusive range specified.3. In addition it is possible to ignore the free surface moment if the VCG correction for a single tank. This functionality is accessed through the Analysis | Fluids dialog: Fluid Analysis dialog If the corrected the VCG method is used.e.

This is because the actual free surface moment to be used to determine the VCG in a loadcase depends on the method being used and also the heel angle in question (in the case of the IMO correction). In this case.3. Although the computational potential is available.01m min where M fs is the free surface moment of the tank in question and is the ship displacement at the minimum mean service draft of the ship without cargo.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax 3. It is reasonably accurate at low angles of heel and trim. The effective rise in VCG due to the tanks' free surface is calculated by summing the free surface moment of all the tanks and dividing by the total vessel displacement (the free surface moment to be applied is specified in the loadcase). if required. Note Most documented stability criteria assume that the corrected VCG method has been used. need not be included in the correction: M fs / min 0. There are several FSM types available. with 10% stores and minimum water ballast. Fluid analysis method: Use corrected VCG Tank capacities and free surface moments are calculated for the upright hull (zero trim and zero heel). These values are automatically calculated from the maximum free surface moments of the tanks. not those from the actual second moment of area of the inclined tank waterplane. see Working with Loadcases on page 38. For more information. as it corresponds with the traditional approach used by naval architects and classification societies worldwide. Note that the upright free surface moments as shown in the loadcase are used. authorities have not adopted this more accurate calculation of the shift in centre of gravity due to fluid movement. Note: Tank Calibration results In the tank calibration results the free-surface moment based on the transverse second moment of area of the tank waterplane is given for all filling levels.9 Small tanks which satisfy the following condition using the values of "k" corresponding to an angle of inclination of 30°. the loading window will include a column for free surface moment and cells for corrected fluid VCG. This method should be used when compiling a stability booklet for a design. calculated in the upright condition. Page 149 . Note: Calculation of GM GM values always use the centre of gravity corrected for free surface moments even if the “simulate fluid” option has been chosen.

free surface moments and corrected fluid VCG are normally not displayed in the loadcase. or with tanks whose heeled water plane area may be significantly different from the upright case (i.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Fluid analysis method: Simulate fluid movement This method is a faithful simulation of the static movement of the centre of gravity of the fluid in each tank. When selected. Density using the current units. the density of sea water (the fluid in which the vessel is floating) and fluids commonly carried on board can be adjusted using the Density dialog. or wide shallow tanks). When fluid simulation method is selected.e. It is particularly useful at high angles of heel or trim. density may be specified using Barrels as the unit of volume. Density of Fluids Where necessary. or non-dimensional relative density (specific gravity). Page 150 . Equilibrium Condition and Longitudinal Strength (the Longitudinal Strength analysis always uses fluid simulation). however the results are significantly more accurate. KG. Alternatively. Conversions are performed automatically. and GM. tall narrow tanks. Every tank is rotated to the heel and trim angle being analysed. filled to the volume specified in the loadcase. the actual fluid level in the tank. The new centre of gravity is calculated for each tank and used in the analysis. VCG and TCG are calculated for the whole design and used in the calculation of GZ.e. This approach is used when the stability of a vessel is being investigated and the closest possible simulation of the hull's behaviour is required. Hydromax iterates to find the fluid level for the rotated tank at the specified capacity. may be specified. will be displayed in the View window. i. The penalty of using this approach is that the calculation time is longer. When fluid simulation is used in one of these analyses. Specific gravity is calculated relative to a fluid having a density of 1000.0 kg/m3. Large Angle Stability. The new LCG. fluid simulation is used for analyses that use a loadcase. Otherwise the complete tank will be shown.

9200 0. The name and code for the first entry. specific gravity. Thus. you would change the density of "Sea Water" to 1000. There is one row for each of the 18 fluid types. each separated by a tab character. colour respectively (the colour is in hexadecimal for the red.8883 0. it is necessary to change the density of this fluid. Sea Water. Note that only the custom fluids may have their names changed.0 kg/m3. Tank calibrations results and loading conditions will also be updated.0250 1.9443 0.8400 0. The densities file may be edited manually if desired.0000 0. Sea Water Water Ballast Fresh Water Diesel Fuel Oil Lube Oil ANS Crude Gasoline leaded S B W D F L C G 1.0250 1. These are fluid name.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax By assigning a code to the fluid you can easily apply the fluid type in the Compartment Definitions table. All other entries may be edited (the same restrictions area applied as when editing through the Density dialog). Tanks that have been specified as containing one of these fluids will be updated automatically when the density of the fluid is changed in the Density dialog. fluid code. cannot be changed (any changes made will be ignored). if you wanted to carry out an analysis for a vessel in fresh water. Note The vessel's hydrostatics are always calculated assuming the vessel is floating in the fluid labelled "Sea Water". The four columns. Saving and Loading Densities Densities listed in the Density table can be saved and loaded using the File menu. green. If the vessel is to float in a different fluid. blue components and are probably much more easily edited in the Density dialog. This is the first fluid in the list printed in bold font.7499 6D00FF00FF00 6D006D00FF00 FF005F005F00 FF005B00FF00 6D00FF006D00 7F007F007F00 3F003F003F00 FF0000007F00 Page 151 .

The wavelength defaults to the waterline length of the hull at the DWL. the waveheight reduces linearly with wavelength given by the formula: Wave height = 0.9130 1. If the wavelength is modified the wave height defaults to a value in metres of: Wave height [m] = 0.0000 1. If a waveform is specified.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Unlead.0000 1.0000 1.8203 0. or as a sinusoidal or trochoidal waveform.075875 Wavelength Page 152 . select the Waveform command from the Analysis menu: The water plane can be specified as flat. the wavelength. Gas. To specify a waveform.0000 1.0000 FF007F007F00 7F007F00FF00 F600FA00C900 FF00FF007F00 FF006F00FF00 D6000300D600 D600D6000300 0300D600D600 D60003000300 DF00DF00DF00 If you make an error.7471 0. Also see: Windows Registry on page 16 Waveform Hydromax is capable of analysing hydrostatics and stability in arbitrary waveforms as well as for a level water plane.1 √ Wavelength [ft] For short waves of wavelength less than 64m.7499 0. JFA MTBE Gasoil Slops Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 U J M GO SL C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 0.607 √ Wavelength [m] This is the metric equivalent of the US Naval standard wave height: Wave height [ft] = 1.8524 0. you can always reset the densities to their default values in the Densities dialog. wave height and phase offset can be specified.

It is possible to specify grounding on one or two points of variable length. the sum of the buoyancy and the grounding reactions equals the loadcase displacement. Damage can be specified concurrently with grounding. a phase offset of 0. the wave height may be modified. Page 153 . this will bring the effective centres of gravity and the centre of buoyancy in line vertically. both of which correspond to a wave crest at the forward end of the DWL. The phase offset governs the position of the wave crest aft of the forward end of the DWL. The effective centre of gravity will be modified by the grounding reactions – a mass is effectively being removed from the vessel. whilst GMt and GMl are the actual vertical separation of the metacentres above the centre of gravity in the trimmed reference frame normal to the sea surface. GMt and GMl are all calculated to the effective centre of gravity. this will be reflected in the results: The displacement column will show the total grounding reaction force in brackets. as a proportion of the wavelength. The value of KG. The Equilibrium analysis will determine whether the hull is grounded or free floating and will trim the hull accordingly. If the vessel touches one or both grounding points. Grounding Grounding is an additional analysis environment option for the Equilibrium or Longitudinal Strength analysis. Remember that KG is measured in the upright vessel reference frame (normal to the baseline).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Once a wavelength has been set.5. will give a single wave crest at amidships. with a wavelength equal to the waterline length. The phase offset varies between 0 and 1. For example.

The vessel is considered to pivot at the centre of the grounding point. The length of the grounding points is only used when considering the load distribution for Longitudinal Strength analysis and not to determine the pivot point. Damage You can specify whether the model is to be analysed in intact or damaged condition using the Analysis Toolbar.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Note: Grounding points are considered to span the transverse extents of the hull and therefore constrain the heel to zero. i. Stability Criteria Stability criteria may be seen as the “environment of authorities” that the ship will be deployed in.e. When two grounding points are entered. Also see: Damage Case Definition on page 71 Page 154 . Note: Fixed zero heel during grounding analysis The equilibrium analysis will only consider the longitudinal balance of moments. the first point (edit boxes on the left) must refer to the forward grounding point. the vessel will not be balanced in heel and the vessel will remain upright (zero heel) even if the transverse metacentric height is less than zero. the second grounding point is the aft grounding point. For more information see Chapter 4 Stability Criteria starting at page 163.

Page 155 . Streaming results to Word It is possible to stream the Analysis results directly to Word. To do this: Edit | Preferences Select the option to Send the Report to Word This will send the Report document to Word instead of to the Report window. This then allows you to validate the results at the same time. Select the option to send the results to the report window if you require Graphs. For large numbers of cases.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Analysis Output Hydromax will produce the following output data: Hydromax model visualisation Result data tables per analysis Graphs per analysis Report o o o Report window Streamed directly to a Word document Report Templates In this section: Reporting Copying Select View from Analysis Data Saving the Hydromax Design Exporting Reporting Hydromax has several options to do your reporting: Batch Analysis text file and/or streaming to Report window Automatically generate a report in the Report Window for each analysis run Automatically Streaming results to Word Manually copy and paste tables and graphs from the Results Window and Graph Window The most efficient method depends on the number of loadcases and damage cases you have to analyse and the output you require. This also applies to Batch Analysis. Batch Analysis results saved as text files do not include graphs. it is recommended to use batch analysis. Additionally. if the option to Stream the report to Word has been selected in the Edit | Preferences dialog a word document is automatically generated after a Batch Analysis. After you have run an analysis a Word document is created and opened automatically. Form small number of loadcases and damage cases you can do a manual copy and paste of the results into a report.

dot Page 156 . With report templates.dotx/dotm (for Word 2007) format and will be used when creating any future reports. it is possible to use template keywords to specify where in the document the analysis results go and where each element of the output (such as graph. Please note that Send Report to Word must be enabled before you can enable this option. To turn on Report Templating you need to select it in the Preferences dialog box.dot or .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Report Templates Hydromax offers the ability to customise reports through a Report Template. Two Report Templates have been included to get you started: StabilityBooklet. tables. This feature is only available when sending reports to Microsoft Word. See the dialog box below as an example: The Word Template File specified should be in . instead of just dumping the results of each analysis into a Word document. You can use one of the sample templates provided. or you can build your own template. Simply tick the box „Use Word Templating‟. etc) is placed. This gives you much greater control over how the analysis results are output than with the normal Send Report to Word option and allows you to customise your own report template document.

Copying Hull Views Pictures of the hull in the View windows may be copied to the Clipboard using the Copy command from the Edit menu.dot and then use it customise their own report template. Copying & Printing A range of options for transferring data from Hydromax to other programs such as spreadsheets and word processors is provided through copy and paste functions. These allow you to easily add and remove the analysis keyword blocks. Data Format on page 207 for tips on how to specify what should be displayed and customise how to display tables (vertical or horizontal). due to new security changes we‟ve had to move this to an alternative location that every user has write access to – so you can find it at: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Maxsurf\Maxsurf14\Report Templates\ Tips: See: Copying Tables on page 158 for tips on how to include the table header in a copy paste to for example Excel Graph Formatting on page 190 for tips on how to format your graph prior to copying to another application. Users can start with StabilityBootlet.dot This document is a good starting point for creating your own customised template. On Windows XP/Server 2003 the default location for the report templates is: C:\Program Files\Maxsurf 14\Report Templates\ On Windows Vista. This data transfer works both ways: e.g. Both of these templates contain macros and toolbar items to make life easier when you design your own template. Note: To edit a report template in Microsoft Word you will need to start Microsoft Word and then open the template directly using the File menu. It contains an introduction to how templates are created and configured. The image copied is as per the image displayed in the Hydromax view window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax This is an example of a complete Stability Booklet template – this document is the default Word Template file for new users and is recommend for users wanting to quickly create a Stability Booklet. HMReportTemplate. copying and pasting data to and from Excel spreadsheets allows you to use the full spreadsheet capabilities of Excel on your Hydromax model. Page 157 . It also includes all of the basic analysis blocks and variables to get you started. Simply double-clicking on a template document opens up a new document based on the template (which is not what you want). The location of these report templates varies depending on which operating system you are using.

row.5cm. Note: Copying data from the table with the Shift key depressed. otherwise click the Cancel button.0cm. it is possible to ensure that the graph is plotted to a sensible scale so that measurements can be made directly from the graph. You will be asked if you want to print the graph to scale or to fill the page: The scale used will depend on the length units that are currently selected. but they will be inches instead of cm. Note that the print preview is not refreshed after these changes. range of cells or the whole table and then choose the Copy command or Ctrl+C. will also copy the column headings. 5. Print Preview The page to be printed is initially displayed in print preview mode. additionally. column. Simply select a cell. 2. If these are metric. The titles may be edited by clicking the Titles button.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax These pictures can then be pasted into other applications or the Hydromax Report window. The printing may be forced to be black and white. hold the shift key down when selecting the print command for the graph. 2. To copy a simple bitmap image of the view at the current resolution. Printing Each of the windows in Hydromax may be printed. Prior to printing you may wish to set up the paper size and orientation by using the Page Setup command from the File menu. Graph Printing to Scale When printing the graph.0cm. but the selection will be reflected in the printout. To do this.0cm. then the graph will be plotted so that the grid lines are at one of the following intervals (If the current length units are imperial then similar intervals will be used. Views of the hull in the View window may be printed to scale as in Maxsurf. use Ctrl+I.): 1. To print the page click the Print button. Page 158 . Simply bring the window you wish to print to the front and choose Print from the File menu. The data copied from the table will be placed on the clipboard and can then be pasted into a spreadsheet or word processor for further work. Choose the Colours button and select the options required. a bitmap of the current image may be saved by pressing Ctrl+Shift+I Copying Tables Tables may be copied to the clipboard.

In the View window the hull will be displayed in the selected position. Page 159 . ensure that the View window is topmost and select Save from the File menu. For example: the angle of downflooding can be visualised by returning to the Stability table in the results window. For more information on file properties and extensions in Hydromax.hmd file with the same name as the design. E. The Select View from Data can also be used to display the Curve of Areas graph for each intermediate analysis stage. see Graph type on page 189. the data in the individual tables such as loadcases. Note Although all Hydromax model data is saved in the . compartment definition. may also be saved separately. key points etc. please see: File Extension Reference Table on page 307. for comparing the characteristics of vessels which have only minor differences in hull shape and identical tank layouts and loadcases. Saving the Hydromax Design Hydromax design data may be saved Saving in a Hydromax Design File Saving Input Files separately Saving in a Hydromax Design File To save the design in one file.hmd file automatically every time you press Save from any of the design windows.. Select View from Analysis Data For most analyses. selecting the column at the required heel angle and select “Select View From Data” in the Display menu. Saving Input Files separately In addition to saving all the data together. This gives the option of loading common data into different design files.g. The Hydromax data is saved in a . it is recommended to also save the Hydromax input files separately. each step from the analysis can be visualised when the analysis has completed. damage cases. This can also be done for Upright Hydrostatics and the different wave phase calculations for an Equilibrium analysis in a waveform.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Exporting a Bitmap Image You may also export a bitmap of the rendered perspective view with the File | Export | Bitmap Image command.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Saving Loadcases to a File Once you have set up a loading spreadsheet. Selecting this option saves all the loads displayed in the current tab in the Loadcase window. The Results files are saved as tab delimited text. you can save it in a file on disk. Page 160 . To save the loadcase table. This allows the same loading spreadsheet to be recalled at any time for use with the same design or with any other hull. This allows for further calculations to be done in a spreadsheet or for formatting to be done in Word. You will be asked to name the file and select where it is to be saved. Saving Input Window Tables To save a input window table to a file. meaning that they can be read directly into spreadsheets such as Excel with values being placed in individual spreadsheet cells. Exporting The data export function in Hydromax is similar to Maxsurf. select Save from the File menu. Excel or other programs. ensure the Loadcase window is topmost on the screen and choose Save Load Case from the File Menu. Saving Damage Cases to a File Bring the Damage window to the front and select Save Damage Cases or Save Damage Cases As from the file menu. bring the Input window to the front and choose the required input table. To save the data. Saving Compartment Definitions to a File To save a compartment definition to a file. Some Hydromax-specific export features are described below. Selecting this option saves all the data currently displayed in the Results window. select Save Compartment Definition from the File menu. Saving Results to a File Once you have performed an analysis. ensure the Results window is topmost on the screen and choose the table containing the data you wish to save. Select Save or Save As from the File Menu. the data generated may be saved as a text file. You will be asked to name the file and select where it is to be saved. bring the Input window to the front and choose the compartment definition table.

0 can be exported using the File | Export menu so that it is compatible with Hydromax version 8.0 After Hydromax version 8. so it is important to have unique compartment names. a major change to the Hydromax file structure was made. each tank. compartment and non-buoyant volume is exported on a separate layer. DXF export Contains all lines displayed in the active design window as closed poly-lines. In addition. please see the “Output of Data” section in the Maxsurf manual. All key points will become downflooding points in the version 8 file and any tank sounding pipe information will be lost.0. Page 161 . Exporting the Model to Hydromax Version 8.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Data export dialog in Hydromax. Hydromax models created in versions greater than version 8. For more information on data export of DXF and IGES. This export function is particularly useful to export tank arrangement drawings. Note: The layer name is the same as the compartment name.

.

Page 163 . Criteria results are added to the Report after a Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analysis. Criteria may be identified as intact or damage criteria (or both). Users may save. import and edit their criteria sets. an overview of what capabilities Hydromax offers with regards to stability criteria. after an Equilibrium analysis only those criteria that are evaluated from Equilibrium data are added. This ensures that the correct criteria are evaluated and displayed during normal and batch analysis. Help information relating to the use and parameters of each criterion is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the dialog. Criteria List Overview Hydromax includes a wide range of criteria.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Chapter 4 Stability Criteria This chapter describes how stability criteria are used in Hydromax. HSC. only the criteria that are selected for evaluation during an intact analysis will be evaluated and added to the report.: if the intact case is being computed. predefined custom criteria and user created custom criteria. However. These custom criteria files may be easily transferred via email. A fixed sub-set of criteria is used for the Floodable length analysis and these criteria are accessed in their own. Parent criteria. This section describes how this list of criteria can be divided up in to Parent heeling arms. explanation how to work with the Hydromax criteria dialog to create your own custom set of criteria. simplified dialog.e. It is also possible for users to create their own custom sets of criteria. The following sections will be discussed: Criteria Concepts. only criteria that are applicable are added to the report. criteria evaluation results Nomenclature. and after a Large Angle Stability analysis only GZ based criteria are added to the report. Stability criteria are evaluated for Large Angle Stability. Although all criteria are displayed in the criteria table.e. This makes it quick and easy to set which criteria should be included for analysis and to change criteria parameters. i. Equilibrium and Limiting KG calculations. This section also explains how all criteria can be divided up into two different criteria types: equilibrium and GZ curve based. Hydromax uses a single dialog to control all the stability criteria. similarly for the damage cases. explanation of terms and definitions See also: Appendix B: Criteria file format Appendix C: Criteria Help Appendix D: Specific Criteria Criteria Concepts Hydromax includes a wide range of template criteria (or: parent criteria) as well as predefined custom criteria such as IMO. ISO and more. Criteria Results. Criteria Procedures. i. These criteria are listed using in a tree control on the left-hand side of the criteria dialog. only the applicable criteria are added to the report (although all are displayed in the Results table). DNV.

These calculations may be referenced in certain criteria. Those heeling moment are then used in a number of different criteria. for example. The Hydromax criteria list contains Parent Heeling Arms that can be copied into a custom criteria folder and then cross-referenced into the stability criteria. Page 164 . Parent calculations in Hydromax Criteria dialog Parent Heeling Arms In most cases a ship is subject to specific heeling moments. the roll-back angle required for the IMO IS code Severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria The criteria tree list Parent Calculations This folder contains calculations that are required for certain criteria parameters.

This is done by dragging the required parent criteria in to the “My custom criteria” group or any other group you create. Parent Criteria The Parent Criteria group contains all the parent criteria types that are available in Hydromax. Page 165 . This is because the parent criteria are intended for use as templates from which you can derive your own custom criteria. Most specific criteria are locked. it is only displayed once in the GZ graph and not duplicated for each criterion that uses it. they will always revert to their default values when Hydromax is restarted. Also see Working with Criteria Libraries on page 172 Appendix D: Specific Criteriaon page 291. This is explained in the section on Working with Criteria on page 168. Predefined Custom Criteria A number of criteria files containing criteria for specific codes are supplied with Hydromax. these are the fundamental criteria from which criteria for specific codes are derived. those that are not locked require your ship design data to be input. This ensures that all criteria which use a specific heeling arm use exactly the same heeling arm. Also the parent criteria settings cannot be saved. they are displayed in bold text in the Criteria list. Parent criteria are special in that you cannot rename. These may be found in the “HMSpecificCriteria” folder. delete or add criteria to the Parent Criteria group. Each parent criterion allows you to perform a specific calculation. Another benefit is that.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria The advantage of using cross-referenced Heeling Arms is that a heeling arm is now defined (and edited) in only one place. since the heeling arm is defined in one place. Furthermore some newer heeling arm criteria are only available for cross-referenced heeling arms and a greater variety of heeling arm definitions are available through cross-referencing. Custom Criteria You can create your own set of criteria in the tree as well. To distinguish the Parent criteria from your derived criteria. This folder can be found in the Maxsurf root directory: c:\program files\Maxsurf.

Equilibrium criteria can be recognised by the icon. A check is also made to ensure that any selected Equilibrium criteria are passed. in some criteria sets some criteria are included twice. GZ area criterion GZ criterion with heeling arm GZ area criterion with heeling arm GZ criterion with several heeling arms and their combinations GZ area criterion with several heeling arms and their combinations Combined GZ criterion. once in the form of an Equilibrium criterion and again as a Large Angle Stability criterion. area under GZ curve between specified limits. notably angle of equilibrium heel. it must be a LAS criterion.g. This can be measured from the GZ curve by looking for an up-crossing of the GZ=0 axis. metacentric height. These criteria are often referred to as Large Angle Stability (LAS) or GZ criteria. Note that there is some cross-over between the criteria types. The different types of criteria and their icons are described below: Folder icon. These icons are derived from the parent criterion type. See next: Criteria Procedures Page 166 . For example. For a criterion to be used in the search for maximum VCG in the Limiting KG analysis. e. These criteria perform several individual tests on the GZ curve. e. etc. These criteria make measurements from the GZ curved obtained from a Large Angle Stability analysis. trim angle. You will notice that different icons are used to differentiate between different types of criteria. STIX. Criteria derived from measurements of the GZ curve. angle of maximum GZ. Equilibrium criterion. These are calculated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and during a Limiting KG analysis. create separate folders to store related criteria. This type of criterion is also used by the Floodable Length analysis. This is because it is only this type of criteria that is more likely to pass as VCG is reduced. etc. These criteria are evaluated only after an equilibrium analysis has been performed. freeboard measurements. Weather criterion. All folders must have unique names (even if the parent folders have different names). Combined GZ heeling arm criterion. but they cannot be included directly in the search algorithm. For this reason. The same also applies for GMt. The equilibrium heel angle is also a fundamental output of the Equilibrium analysis.g. GZ criterion. These criteria perform several individual tests on the GZ curve including a heeling arm.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Types of criteria There are two fundamental types of criteria: Equilibrium criteria Equilibrium criteria are evaluated after an Equilibrium analysis and refer only to the condition of the vessel in its equilibrium state For example: margin line immersion tests.

.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Criteria Procedures This section describes how to work with the stability criteria dialog. Starting the Criteria dialog Resizing the Criteria dialog Working with Criteria Editing Criteria Working with Criteria Libraries Starting the Criteria dialog The criteria dialog allows you to select which criteria are selected for inclusion in the analysis and change their parameters. select Criteria from the Analysis menu: or use the Criteria button. in the analysis toolbar: Page 167 . To bring up the Criteria dialog.

Page 168 . Note that if.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria The criteria dialog is shown below: Note: The Floodable Length analysis uses its own set of criteria. This section explains how to create and customise your own criteria from the Parent Heeling Arms and Criteria provided with Hydromax. The criteria command will bring up the Floodable Length Criteria dialog when the Floodable Length analysis is selected. This behaviour is the same as all other resizing dialogs. in the unlikely event that the dialog items vanish due to resizing the dialog. Working with Criteria In the Concepts section it was explained how the criteria are listed in a tree list. the dialog size can be reset by holding down the “Shift” key when you open the dialog. Resizing the Criteria dialog The dialog may be resized and a vertical and horizontal slider can be used to resize the width of the Criteria List and the height of the Criterion Details areas.

click again on the on the item’s name to edit its name Some short-cut keys for the tree list: Tree control smart keys Alt+Keypad * Right Arrow or Alt+Keypad + Left Arrow or Alt+ Keypad Up Arrow Down Arrow Space Criteria Tree Right-click Context Menu Function Recursively expands the current group completely Expands the current group Collapses the current group Move one item up tree Move one item down tree Include criterion for analysis Several options are available by right-clicking on a criterion or criterion group: Criterion right-click menu Include for Analysis: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated. If a criterion is locked.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Using the Criteria Tree List The tree works in much the same way as the file folders in Windows Explorer:     Click on the “+” sign to expand the folder (or double click on it). Intact: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated for intact conditions. Page 169 . Locking is used for criteria belonging to specific codes where the required values are fixed. Click on the “-” sign to collapse the group (or double click on it). Lock: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) are locked. Click on an item’s name or icon to select it Once selected. Damage: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated for damaged conditions. this prevents inadvertent editing of its parameters.

If duplicate group names exit. Paste: Paste the criterion (or whole criterion group) from the clipboard to the selected location Rename: Renames the criterion or group. Note that if you drag a criterion from the Parent Criteria group a copy will be made and the original will not be deleted. Delete: Deletes the criterion or all the criteria and sub-groups within the group. then loading the criteria file may cause unexpected results. then clicking again in the label. If there are groups with the same name. This may also be done by selecting the label. As criteria (and new groups) are loaded they are inserted into the first group that is found with a name that matches the name of the group to which the criterion should belong. Other functions are available from a menu activated when the right button is clicked on your mouse.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Add Group: Add a new criterion group. Alternatively use the Copy and Paste functions from the right-click context menu (see above). Editing Criteria The specific details for a criterion are displayed in the table in the top-right of the dialog: Page 170 . It is extremely important to ensure that all criteria groups have unique names. Defining new Custom Criteria and Groups New custom criteria sets may be created by first creating a new criterion group and then dragging the desired criteria into the criterion group. Copy: Copy the criterion (or whole criterion group) to the clipboard. By holding down the Ctrl button a copy of the criterion being dragged is created (unless it is a parent criterion. you can hold down the CTRL-key while moving the criteria you will copy the criteria. This may then be pasted into another location in the tree. Copying criteria You can use the Criteria Tree Right-click Context Menu to copy and paste criteria. in which case a copy will be made regardless of whether the Ctrl key is held down or not). This may then be pasted into another location in the tree. Selecting the Criteria for Analysis Criteria may be selected for analysis by ticking the tick box to the left of the criterion. all criteria that should be in a group of that name will end up in the first one and none in the second. Cut: Cut the criterion (or whole criterion group) to the clipboard. To select an entire group. Alternatively. right-click on the group and choose Include for Analysis from the menu. Moving Criteria Criteria may be moved from one group to another by dragging them with the left-mousebutton or by using the cut and paste functions in the right-click context menu (see above).

Please note that the criteria are updated as you change their data and that there is no “Cancel” function for this dialog. where the items are mutually exclusive. at least one must be selected. For example the limits for an upper integration range or the individual criteria to be evaluated for a more complex criterion: In both of these cases the selection is cumulative and none of the selections are mutually exclusive. the check boxes act as radio buttons and only one may be selected. This occurs. In other cases. Check Boxes in Criteria Properties Section of Criteria Dialog There is some subtly different behaviour for the check boxes in the dialog depending on their context.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Criterion details table To edit the parameters for a specific criterion. those which cannot be edited. or click the dialog‟s Close button. If in doubt. The parameters that may be adjusted have a white background. However. have a grey background. Edit the parameters as required and then select the next criterion to be edited from the tree. with the “Value of GMt at” criterion: Page 171 . In most cases there will be group of related options used to define a criterion parameter. click on the criterion‟s name in the tree and the criterion‟s parameters will be displayed in the table on the right. The values that are required for passing a criterion are in bold. for example. use the File | Save Criteria command to save a copy of your current criteria selection and data before making any changes in the Criteria dialog.

These options may either be set using the right-click menu or by ticking the appropriate boxes in the bottom of the dialog: Intact and Damage tick-boxes. which consists of the Parent criteria and a “My Custom Criteria” group. Hydromax will try to open the default criteria library file called: “Hydromax Criteria Library.hcr” from the directory in which the Hydromax program resides. If this file cannot be found. Working with Criteria Libraries It is possible to load and save the criteria. A third option which is not yet implemented is WOD (Water on deck) this checkbox has no effect. GZ curve reduction in the wind heeling criteria: Criterion Pass/Fail Test There are some subtle differences between the wordings for different criteria. Hydromax allows you to make this distinction by selecting the required comparison from a combo-box in the criterion row of the details table: Description Shall be greater than Shall not be less than Shall be less than Shall not be greater than Damage and Intact Symbol > ≥ < ≤ Logical test Greater than Greater than or equal to Less than Less than or equal to Criteria may be defined as intact or damage stability criteria (or both). Criteria that are defined for both are always evaluated. you will be prompted to locate a criteria file: You may select an alternative file or click the Cancel button to proceed and be given the default criteria. For example one criterion may state “Shall be greater than…”.hcr. Default Criteria Library File When starting. whereas another may state “Shall not be less than…”.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Finally a check box can be used to select whether a specific effect should be included. The parent criteria. Intact criteria are only evaluated for the intact case and damage criteria are evaluated when a damage case has been selected (irrespective of whether there are actually any damaged compartments or tanks in the damage case). built into Hydromax are not saved. for example. Page 172 . only the criteria that you create or import will be saved. By default this is c:\program files\Maxsurf\ Hydromax Criteria Library.

You can import several criteria files in one go using Shift. The default criteria library will be over-written with the new criteria so if you wish to keep any custom criteria that you may have added to your default criteria library. all criteria are still available. That way. however. Even if you loaded an alternative file. Note It is good practise to save the criteria file with the project in the project folder. These may be found in the “HMSpecificCriteria” folder. updates will be saved in the default criteria library. all existing criteria except the parent criteria will be removed and replaced by those in the file you are opening. not in the new groups. Saving Criteria It is also possible to save the criteria into a new file. This can be useful when you are defining new custom sets of criteria that you wish to keep separate or when defining criteria sets for different vessels. so if you want to save any further changes you will have to resave as described above. continue to be saved to the default criteria library file that was opened when Hydromax was first started. the imported criteria will be found in the original groups. Note that when keeping your existing criteria. This will simply export all the custom criteria (parent criteria are not saved) to the specified file.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria The default criteria library will be automatically updated every time the criteria dialog is closed. See Saving Criteria below. either overwriting the existing one or creating a new one. Importing Criteria and Specific Criteria Files New criteria may be added to your criteria list by importing them – choose Import Criteria from the File menu. Page 173 . or Ctrl select to select multiple files in the Open Hydromax Criteria dialog. If this does occur. when at a later stage you need to re-analyse the project. You will then be asked if you wish to keep the existing criteria: If you choose “Yes” your existing criteria will be kept. you must save them in a new file first. Choose Save Criteria As from the File menu. if you choose “No”. it is important to ensure that the group names in the file you are importing are not the same as those that already exist. A number of criteria containing criteria for specific codes are supplied with Hydromax. Further updates will.

Results may be displayed in “Verbose” or “Compact” format (see above).g. The file is a normal PC text file. angle of equilibrium. This allows you to edit criteria parameters or selected criteria and re-evaluate using the existing analysis results. The format for the results table and the report are specified separately. Intermediate values are displayed. Criteria Results After a Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analysis. etc. criteria are evaluated and the results displayed in the Stability Criteria table in the Results window. have n/a in the Actual and/or Value column.: angle of vanishing stability. Criteria can also be re-evaluated without having to redo the analysis when “Close and Recalculate” is selected in the criteria dialog. Criteria Results Table The tested criteria are listed one above the other..Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Criteria File Format The criteria are saved in a Hydromax criteria file with the extension . Values that could not be calculated. e. Editing this file will also allow you to add your own help text or associate rich text format help files (rtf) files with your criteria.hcr. Chose the Display | Data Format command when the Stability Criteria results are displayed: Page 174 . The typical format of the file is given in the following file: c:\Program Files\Maxsurf\\HMCriteriaHelp\CriteriaHelp. This is normally due to an insufficient range of heel angle having been used.html. After calculation the relevant criteria are also added to the Report. which may be edited manually so as to generate custom criteria.

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Stability criteria results window: compact format Stability criteria results window: verbose format Page 175 .

metacentric height. These are calculated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and during a Limiting KG analysis. This type of criterion is also used by the Floodable Length analysis. Note: The metacentre is always (even for Large Angle Stability criteria) computed directly from the vessel‟s hydrostatic properties (i.e. Criteria derived from measurements of the GZ curve.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Report and Batch Processing As noted earlier. For example. water-plane inertia and immersed volume) at the specified heel angle and not from the slope of the GZ curve. i. trim angle. freeboard measurements.e. are not added to the Report (although they are displayed in the Criteria Results table). Definitions of GZ curve features Some typical GZ curves are shown below. angle of maximum GZ. For example damage criteria during intact analysis or Equilibrium criteria during a Large Angle Stability analysis are not added to the report. Page 176 . Also see Reporting on page 155 Batch Analysis on page 138 Nomenclature This section gives a brief description of the various values that are determined by Hydromax in the evaluation of criteria. There are two distinct types of criteria: Equilibrium criteria Equilibrium criteria are evaluated after an Equilibrium analysis and refer only to the condition of the vessel in its equilibrium state For example: margin line immersion tests. This gives an accurate result that is not dependent on the heel angles and intervals tested during the analysis. Criteria that are not relevant. These criteria are often referred to as Large Angle Stability (LAS) or GZ criteria. only the relevant criteria results are added to the Report and/or Batch file. etc. area under GZ curve between specified limits. any criteria that have a “not analysed” result. Equilibrium criteria can be recognised by the icon. etc. the third graph shows the GZ curve with a heeling arm overlayed.

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Typical GZ curve Unusual GZ curve with double peak Page 177 .

this often occurs if the vessel has a large watertight cabin. The angle of vanishing stability with a given heeling arm is the smallest positive angle where the GZ curve crosses the heel arm curve and where the GZ-Heel Arm curve has negative slope. Page 178 . The downflooding angle is the smallest positive angle at which a downflooding point becomes immersed. The equilibrium angle is the angle closest to zero where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope. The angle of the first peak is the lowest positive angle at which a local maximum in the GZ curve occurs. the GZ curve may have multiple peaks. In some cases. The equilibrium angle with a given heeling arm is the angle closest to zero where the GZ curve crosses the heel arm curve where the GZ-Heel Arm curve has positive slope.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria GZ curve with heeling arm superimposed GZ Definitions The table below defines how Hydromax calculates the various features of the GZ curve: Angle of vanishing stability Angle of vanishing stability with heeling arm curve Downflooding angle Equilibrium angle Equilibrium angle with heeling arm curve First peak in GZ curve The angle of vanishing stability is the smallest positive angle where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with negative slope.

the heeling arm is forced to be zero at heel angles greater than 90° and less than -90°. These include the effects of wind. The location of the metacentre is computed from the water-plane inertia. Page 179 .heel arm) is a maximum Maximum GZ Maximum GZ above heeling arm curve Glossary The table below describes some commonly used terms: Angle of heel measured from upright. i.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria GML or GMT GZ Curve Heeling arm curve Vertical separation of the longitudinal or transverse metacentre and centre of gravity. If the heeling arm has a power of cos greater than zero.e. not the slope of the GZ curve. the resulting heel angle after the roll back has been applied is more negative than the original. rotated to the specified heel (and trim) angle. 1998 CODATA recommended value for standard acceleration of gravity A negative heel angle change. flat deck at the resultant vessel heel and trim.80665ms-2 Roll back angle The maximum slope of an initially horizontal. Positive angle at which the value of GZ is a maximum Positive angle at which the value of (GZ . Used for some wind heeling criteria. Often a roll back angle is measured from some equilibrium position. which are applied to the vessel. the Gust Ratio is the ratio of the magnitude of the gust wind heeling arm to the steady wind heeling arm. This is typically used to assess the effects of external heeling moments. If a criterion uses a roll back angle. the heeling arm curves will have different shapes. The curve of vessel righting arm (GZ) plotted against vessel heel angle A curve of heeling lever. Commonly used in wind and weather criteria to account for the action of waves rolling the vessel into the wind. centripetal effects of tuning. Depending on the moment that they represent. The heeling arms are never allowed to be negative. which is superimposed on the GZ curve. the heeling arm is made zero. etc. it is often necessary to calculate the GZ curve for negative angles of heel. if the cos function goes negative. passenger crowding. Deck Slope / maximum slope Gust Ratio g = 9. Note that the centre of gravity used is the upright centre of gravity corrected by the free surface moments of partially filled tanks in their upright condition. combined effect of heel and trim.

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
This chapter contains brief descriptions of the tools available in Hydromax:
Windows Toolbars Menus

Windows
Hydromax uses a range of graphical, tabular, graph and report windows.
View Window Loadcase Window Damage Window Input Window Results Window Graph Window Report Window

Assembly View and Property Sheet

An assembly view has been added to Hydromax, this makes it easier to control the visibility of individual tanks and surfaces. The Properties sheet can be used to change tank properties of the tank currently selected in the Assembly or design View.
View Window

The View window displays the hull, frame of reference, immersed sections of the hull and any compartments, and the centroids of gravity, buoyancy, and flotation. These positions are represented by: cb cg cf K centre of buoyancy centre of gravity centre of flotation location of keel (K) for KN during KN analysis

You can choose which type of view is displayed by selecting from the Window menu or the View toolbar. The Zoom, Shrink, Pan and Home View commands from the View menu may be used and work in exactly the same way as in Maxsurf. If a Perspective view is shown, you may also use the Pitch, Roll and Yaw indicators to change the angle of view. Please refer to the Maxsurf manual if you are unfamiliar with these functions. You may set the visibility of the various display elements by using the Visibility command from the Display menu. Two sets of visibility flags are maintained, one is used for all analyses other than tank calibration and the other is used for when the tank calibration analysis is selected.
Page 181

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

If a view window is visible when an analysis is being carried out, it will display the hull shape using the correct heel trim and immersion for the current step of the analysis. After an analysis, the Select View from Data command in the Display menu may be used to move the hull to a selected position from the Results window. The view of the tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes can be toggled between an outline view and a view of the sections.
Perspective view

In the perspective view, the model may be rendered.

The rendered view also enables tanks and compartments to be more easily visualised, especially when the hull shell is made transparent.

The rendering options are to be found in the Display menu, with further lighting options in the Render toolbar. Please refer to the Maxsurf manual for more information on the different rendering options available in perspective view.

Page 182

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

Note: Fastest performance will be achieved by reducing the amount of redrawing that is required from Hydromax. For this reason, it is best to turn off sections, and especially waterlines, when performing an analysis. You may then turn them on again after the analysis has completed. For fastest performance, e.g. when running in Batch mode, minimise the Hydromax window so that no redrawing occurs.

Loadcase Window

In the Loadcase window a spreadsheet table of all loads and tanks is displayed.

Using the tabs on the bottom of the window allow you to quickly browse through the different loadcases. Hydromax allows you to improve the presentation of the Load Case window by adding blank, heading or sub-total lines in the table. For more information see Working with Loadcases on page 38. The columns that are displayed may be selected using the Display | Data Format dialog.
Damage Window

The Damage window is used to specify which tanks and compartments are flooded in each damage case. There is always an Intact case, which cannot be edited, this is the default condition. If flooded volumes are required in the intact case they should be defined as non-buoyant volumes.

Page 183

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

Input Window

The Input window contains tables where the additional Hydromax design data is entered. The tables in the Input window contain the:
Compartment Definition Sounding Pipes Key Points Margin Line Points Modulus Points Bulkhead locations

The input window contains tabs on the bottom that allow you to quickly browse through the different input tables.
Compartment Definition

This table can be used to define the tanks and compartments in the Hydromax models. For more information see Modelling Compartments on page 51 in the Analysis Input section.
Sounding Pipes

This table is used to define the tank sounding pipes and calibration intervals. Default values are provided but these may be edited if necessary.

Page 184

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

Key Points

There are several types of Key Points:
Down Flooding points Potential Down flooding points Embarkation points Immersion Points

Only downflooding points are used in determining the downflooding angle, which is used in criteria evaluation.
Margin Line Points

The margin line is used in a number of the criteria. Hydromax automatically calculates the position of the margin line 76mm below the deck edge when the hull is first read in. If necessary, the points on the margin line may be edited manually in the Margin Line Points window (the deck edge is automatically updated so that it is kept 76mm above the margin line).
Modulus Points

This table is used to define the allowable limits for shear force and bending moment during the longitudinal strength calculations.
Bulkheads

See Floodable Length Bulkheads on page 77. Results Window

The Results window contains ten tables, one for each of the different analysis types plus criteria results and key points results tables. When switching mode, the currently selected results table will change to reflect the current analysis mode. Note that results are never invalidated if analysis options are modified – it is up to the user to ensure that the results are recalculated as necessary.
Setting the Data Format

It is possible to configure Hydromax so that only the results that you wish to see are displayed. To do this, choose Data Format from the Display menu.

Page 185

To change the format. select Data Format from the Display menu. You may change the display format at any time after the analysis without having to redo the calculations. Page 186 . but are not displayed. or so that each draft is on a separate row. Items that are selected with a tick will be displayed in the Results window and on any printed output.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference A dialog similar to the one above will appear. Equilibrium and Specified condition Analysis. For example. with Upright Hydrostatics. Items that are not selected are still calculated during the analysis cycle. Data Layout Most analysis data can be formatted vertically or horizontally to fit better on the screen or the printed page. the data can be formatted so that each draft has a column of results. Key Points Data Result Window Key points data is calculated for Large Angle Stability. The data available for display depends on the analysis. and select either the horizontal or vertical layout button. The DF angle column is only visible when the analysis mode is set to Large Angle Stability and the Freeboard column is only displayed when the analysis mode is set to Equilibrium or Specified condition.

by selecting the desired format in the Display | Data format dialog.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Stability Criteria Result Window If stability criteria are turned on in the analysis menu. where all the intermediate calculations are shown. Page 187 . The results of the criteria evaluation are presented in this table after Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses. they will be evaluated during Large Angle Stability. Criteria results are not displayed in this table after a Limiting KG analysis. The results may be displayed in compact format: Alternatively. the results can be displayed in verbose format. Limiting KG and Equilibrium analyses.

Hydromax will automatically display the graph that displays the result of the current analysis when you select Graph from the Windows menu or press the toolbar button. Alternatively you can select a specific graph using the Windows | Graphs menu item. Upright Hydrostatics Analysis: Hydrostatics Curves of Form Curve of areas – different graph for each draft tested (selected using Display|Select view from data) Large angle stability Analysis Righting Lever (GZ) Curve of areas – different graph for each heel angle tested (selected using Display|Select view from data) Max steady heel angle Large angle stability (hydrostatic data other than GZ) Curves of Form Dynamic stability (GZ area) Equilibrium Analysis: Curve of areas Specified condition Analysis: Curve of areas KN Values Analysis: Cross curves (KN) Limiting KG Analysis: Limiting KG Floodable length Analysis: Floodable length Longitudinal strength Analysis: Longitudinal strength Curve of areas Tank Calibration One graph for each tank For many graphs you can select what is plotted and other options with the Display | Data Format dialog. Only the graphs that are applicable to the current analysis can be displayed. which show the results of the current analysis.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Graph Window The Graph window displays graphs. Page 188 . Graphs can be copied using the Edit | Copy command. Depending on the analysis mode. different graphs are available.

The area is integrated from zero heel angle to the location of the graph slider. Click anywhere on the dashed line and drag it with the mouse. the area is always given in units of length. the slider data is displayed at the bottom of the Graph window.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Graph type Hydromax can graph many types of data depending on the type of analysis being performed. Longitudinal Strength. Curve of Areas. Page 189 . Area and corresponding heel angle can be measured by using the slider. GZ Graph The GZ value. use the mouse to click anywhere on the curve.degrees and cannot be displayed in units of length. Note: Because the horizontal axis scale is always in degrees. Hydromax will ignore the exact position you click on the curve to allow reading all related interpolated values along the black dashed line. Interpolating Graph Data To display an interpolated value from one of the curves.radians. Curves of Form. Note: In case multiple curves are plotted in the same graph you can switch between the curves by clicking on them. Tip: You can use the Select View from Analysis Data option (page 159) to see the Curve of Areas for each heel angle and/or intermediate stage during the analysis. Floodable Length and Tank Capacities. These can all be displayed via the Graphs item in the Windows menu. These graphs include Upright Hydrostatics. The data in the lower left corner of the window will change to display the curve name and co-ordinates of the mouse on the curve. Righting Lever (GZ curve). as you move the cursor the interpolated values will be displayed.

This can sometimes be useful if you expect a discontinuity in the GZ curve. Since the graph data contains more data points than most tables in the results window. Curve fitting for GZ graph A curve fit will be performed if all the heel angle intervals are less than or equal to 10˚. Thus if you require the area between two limits.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Note The lower integration limit is always zero (irrespective of the equilibrium angle). Graph Formatting When you are in the Graph window you can use the View | Colours and lines dialog to change the colours of the curves in the graph as well as the background. Also see: Copying Tables on page 158. this double click can be extremely helpful to export the analysis data to for example Excel fro further processing. Page 190 . where there is no tabular data available. a parametric cubic spline is used to fit a smooth curve through the calculated GZ data at the specified heel angles. If you wish to prevent this curve fitting. Copying Graphs You can copy the contents of the Graph window using the Copy command or Ctrl+C. Note that the picture is placed in the clipboard as a meta-file which can be resized in Word or Excel. add a heel angle interval of greater than 10˚ as the final step. Graph data The graphed data can be obtained by double clicking on the graph. If this is the case. This ensures that the fitted line goes exactly through the calculated GZ points. Especially in the case of the sectional area curve. The View | Font command allows you to change the text size and font size. you must subtract the area at the lower limit from the area at the higher limit.

Report Window Hydromax contains a Report window. As the built-in report window only has basic editing and formatting functionality. saved to and recalled from a disk file. Underneath all of this you have your actual editing area. both Loadcase and Criteria results tables will not be split. fonts etc. However. the File | Page setup command allows you to customise the page orientation and size you wish to use for reporting. printed. this will facilitate generating a table of contents and also allows you to re-format the various styles (or import a custom set of styles using the style organiser in Word). This is important because. as well as a ruler showing you tab stops. This report can be edited via Cut. You can for example choose the landscape Page Setup prior to running an analysis to make the tables fit better. the graph can be edited by right clicking on the graph and selecting “edit picture”. their formatting will not be changed by changes to the print set up. choose an appropriate paper size for the report (the tables will be split to fit this paper size. Copy and Paste. However.). Hence it is often most convenient to select the desired report page set up before any analyses have been made. these should be saved and opened in a word processor such as Microsoft Word or Open Office for formatting: set the results tables up as you want them to appear in the report (the report uses the same column widths. it is recommended that the report window be used only to accumulate the results. so choosing a wide paper size will prevent all but the widest tables from being split). Once all the results have been gathered in the report window. inserted tables will be automatically formatted to fit the current page set up. indentation and margin widths. copy and paste the Hydromax report into Microsoft word. once the tables have been placed into the report. Use the Format | Autoformat function in Word (with the default settings) to set the correct styles for the different levels of heading in the document. Report Window Page Setup When you are in the Report window. do the same for the graph widow. Page 191 . Editing a Report The Report window has it's own toolbar permanently attached to the view.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Note When the graph is pasted in Microsoft Word®. This window is used to create a progressive summary of the analyses that have been carried out. Hydromax will split most results tables so they fit the specified page set up.

Page 192 . The format shown below is metric. but it is strongly recommended not to use any of the formatting commands in the Report window.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference The information below is provided for reference. The toolbar has a number of buttons that allow you to change either the current settings.the format you have displayed on your screen depends on the current Dimension Units you have (use Units in the Display menu to change this). or the section of text that is currently highlighted. in metric and in inches . The toolbar contains the following items: Font combo box Font Size combo box Bold Italic Underline Colour Left Justify Centre Justify Right Justify Bullet Use this to change the current font Use this to change the current font size Use this to toggle the Bold style Use this to toggle the Italic style Use this to toggle the Underline style Use this to set Text Colour Use this to set Left Justification Use this to set Centre Justification Use this to set Right Justification Use this to toggle Bullet Points The Ruler comes in two formats.

To clear a tab position. The 'decimal' tab stop aligns the text at the decimal point. The 'centre' tab stop centres the text at the current tab position. The left tab stop is indicated on the ruler by an arrow with a tail toward the right. perform the analyses. The decimal tab stop is indicated on the ruler by a dot under a straight arrow. To create a centre tab stop. the new results will be appended to the end of the report which may then be resaved). Normally. drag the tab to the desired location and release the mouse button. The 'right' tab stop aligns the text at the current tab stop such that the text ends at the tab marker.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference The Ruler allows you to set left. if you highlight a block of text before initiating a tab command. click the left mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. This is useful if you wish to append an analysis to a report that had been calculated at some time in the past. To create a left tab stop. click the right mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The tab stops are very useful for creating columns and tables. (Load in the old report. The 'left' tab stop indicates where the text following the tab character will start. centre. To create a decimal tab stop. the tab command is then applicable to all the lines in the highlighted block of text. Page 193 . However. right. simply click on the desired tab marker and drag it off the ruler. To create a right tab stop. hold the shift key and click the right mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. While the mouse button is depressed. The centre tab stop is indicated on the ruler by a straight arrow. A paragraph can have as many as 20 tab positions. To move a tab position using the mouse. Keyboard Support for Reports In addition to menu support. The right tab stop is indicated on the ruler by an arrow with a tail toward the left. simply click the left mouse button on the tab symbol on the ruler. a tab command is applicable to every line of the current paragraph. there are also several useful keystrokes that are available while editing the report. These are listed below for convenience: Ctrl+B Toggle Bold on/off Ctrl+U Toggle Underline on/off Ctrl+PageUp Ctrl+PageDown Ctrl+Enter Position at the top of the report Position at the bottom of the report Insert a page break Opening and Saving the Report The report can be saved to a file or read in from a file using the Save and Open Menu commands with the report window highlighted. and decimal tab stops. hold the shift key and click the left mouse button at the specified location on the ruler.

The image copied is as per the image displayed in the Hydromax view window. Page 194 . the image may not maintain its aspect ratio and may be pasted into the report as a square.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Pasting images into the report Sometimes. This is very easily done. Toolbars Hydromax has a number of icons arranged in toolbars to speed up access to some commonly used functions. Ensure that the colors selected will be easily visible in the white background of the report view. paste the image into Microsoft Word first. Depending on which Microsoft operating system you are using (notably Win98). To overcome this problem. You can hold your mouse over an icon to reveal a pop-up tip of what the icon does.Delete Row | Sort Loadcase Rows – Move Loadcase/Tank Row up – Move Loadcase/Tank Row Down View Toolbar The View toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: Zoom – Shrink – Pan – Home View – Rotate – Assembly window. then copy it from Word back into the Hydromax report window. File Toolbar The File toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: New – Open – Save – Cut – Copy – Paste – Print Edit Toolbar The Edit toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: Add Row . by copying an image from one of the design views and then pasting it into the report at the desired location. it is desirable to insert schematic images of the vessel into the report.

– Linked Negative Compartment. Analysis Toolbar The Analysis toolbar contains icons for selecting the current analysis. Window Toolbar Allows quick switching between commonly used windows: Perspective – Plan – Profile – Body Plan | Loadcase – Damage Case | Compartment – Downflooding – Margin Line – Modulus – Bulkheads | Results for Current Analysis – Criteria Results – Key Point Results | Graph – Report Design Grid Toolbar The Design Grid toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views Frame of Reference (always on) | Toggle Design Grid Visibility Design Grid | Design Grid Labels | Design Grid Tickmarks Visibility Toolbar The Visibility toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views: Sections – Datum Waterline – Waterlines | Key Points – Margin Line | Loadcase mass items | Tanks – Damaged Tanks – Compartments – Damaged Compart. The Assembly window is not available in Hydromax.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference The Rotate command is only available in the Perspective window. loadcase and damage case: Analysis Type – Current Loadcase – Current Damage Case The Analysis toolbar also contains icons that execute the following commands: Criteria (dialog) | Start Analysis – Pause Analysis – Resume Analysis | Update Tank Values in Loadcase The “Update Tank Values in Loadcase” is exactly the same as the menu command for “Recalculate Tanks and Compartments on page 206. – NBV – Tank Names – Tank Fluid Level – Tank Sections – Tank Outlines | Probabilistic Damage Zones * NBV = Non Buoyant Volume Page 195 .

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Edge VIsibility Toolbar The Visibility toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views: Hull Surface Edges – Internal Surface Edges – Feature Edges – Bonded Edges Render Toolbar Render – Render transparent – Toggle custom light 1 – Toggle custom light 2 – Toggle custom light 3 – Toggle custom light 4 – Customise light settings Report Toolbar Spool results to report View (extended) Toolbar Set Home View – Colour – Font – Preferences – Properties Design Grid Toolbar Display Frame of Reference (always on) – Display Design Grid – Show Grid – Show Labels – Show Ticks Extra Buttons ToolbarToolbar Add surface areas to loadcase – Preferences | Heel – Trim – Draft – Displacement – Displacement – Specified Condition – Permiability – Fluid simulation – Densities – Waveform – Grounding – Batch Analysis Data Format – Units – Coefficients – Set to DWL – Set View from Data –Visibility Dialog – Show Single Section Page 196 .

If a design is already open. Open When no design is open. the New command will create a new loading condition.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference This toolbar provides a number of buttons for commonly used commands in case you should wish to customise your toolbars. Select the design you wish to open. Selecting Close when one of the design view windows is frontmost will close the current Maxsurf design. Save Selecting Save will save the contents of the frontmost window to a file on the disk. Hydromax will ask whether you wish to save any changes. New creates a new compartment definition. the Open command will open whichever file corresponds to the frontmost input window. Menus The following section describes all of the menu commands available in the Hydromax program. e. File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Case Menu Analysis Menu Display Menu Data Menu Window Menu Help Menu File Menu The File menu contains commands for opening and saving files and printing. click the Open button. When the Compartment Definition table is frontmost. New Creates a new table for whichever input table is frontmost. The requested design will be read in and its hull shape calculated for use in Hydromax. Save As Selecting Save As performs the same function as save but allows you to specify a new filename preventing the original file from being overwritten.g: when the Loadcase Condition is the frontmost window. Import Allows import of file types other than Maxsurf design files Page 197 . selecting the Open command will show a dialog box with a list of available Maxsurf designs. Close The Close command will delete the data in the frontmost window.

IGES exports the NURB surface data. gif. Sail parts are ignored Import DXF Background Enables you to import a DXF file into Hydromax to use as construction lines. In subsequent versions of Hydromax we will add the capability to divide the main buoyant hull into different components. tanks and sounding pipes are read from the GHS file. the geometry is locked: the tank geometry is locked and tanks cannot be added to the model. bmp or png) file into the background of any of the Hydromax design views. The buoyant hull part with the most sections is loaded from the GHS file. interconneceted.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference nuShallo Allows direct import of a nuShallo pan file. The following limitations currently apply. The hull. Hydromax supports only a single buoyant hull part with one byouant component. To enable the export command. It is possible that this might cause problems for some models where the section through the hull at a certain location contains more than one closed contour. The buoyant hull is exported as a single part with a single buoyant component (Non-buoyant volumes are included in this part as components with negative effectiveness). Page 198 . tanks and compartments and key points are all exported. so it is important to have unique compartment names). GHS Allows direct import of a GHS geometry file. Any container parts with elements with negative effectiveness will be read in as tanks. The full model including critical points. chose Edit | Activate GHS export. The DXF file will be displayed in the design views. Export Selecting Export enables you to export a Hydromax file as a variety of different file formats such as: DXF or IGES DXF exports sections as closed poly-lines. See the Maxsurf manual for more information. A full GHS model file may be imported directly into Hydromax for analysis. you may export the Hydromax model to a GHS geometry file. Import Image Background Enables you to import an image file (jpg. but will be removed in subsequent versions: Hydromax supports only a single buoyant hull part. three-dimensional model of the hull. compartment and non-buoyant volume is exported on a separate layer (the layer name being the same as the compartment name. Linked negative tanks are not supported in Hydromax. Hydromax v8. Because the GHS file does not contain a full. GHS If you have a Hydrolink license. All other cotainers are read in as tanks. In addition.0 file Also allows users to export Hydromax files that are compatible with earlier versions of Hydromax. each tank.

After assigning the .xml file and also the location to which it should be saved. For more information on each of the fields in the table click on the Help button on the right hand side of the dialog. Current criteria may be kept or discarded. Fredyn Hydromax is able to export data suitable for input into Fredyn.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Export Bitmap Allows you to export the rendered image as a bitmap file at the specified resolution. Allows you to export the rendered image as a bitmap file at the specified Import Main Criteria Imports criteria from the selected criteria files. hull form and compartment definitions into Fredyn input files. all with the name you specify in the “Fredyn Export XML” dialog.out: Tank calibration results and compartment definitions . and performed a tank calibration. Contours will be formed through the selected surfaces and then trimmed back to the bounding box. exporting Hydromax calibration results. The groups are defined by selecting the surfaces to be measured and defining a boundary box that defines the limiting extents of the group. Before doing the Fredyn export ensure you have specified the desired trim and heel ranges. as this information is required for the export.xml file name.xml: Containing compartment definition . The most important part of the procedure is setting up the groups required in the mesh file. Page 199 . The Export will generate 3 files. Fredyn mesh group definition When exporting from Hydromax to Fredyn you will be asked to name the .txt: Mesh file representing the current hull shape. The following files will be generated . In the group definition dialog. any number of groups may be added and for each group. To export use the File|Export|Fredyn… command. the following dialog will appear: “Fredyn group definition” dialog This dialog is where the user will specify the values for the variables used to generate the mesh file that defines the geometry of the hull. This command is only available when the Perspective window is frontmost with rendering turned on.

Save Prob Damage Criteria As As for main criteria but applies to the probabilistic damage criteria. The whole library may be saved by right clicking on the root “Criteria” branch.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Save Main Criteria As Exports the current criteria set to the specified file. If you have any data or results. Import Prob Damage Criteria As for main criteria but applies to the probabilistic damage criteria. Copy The Copy command allows you to copy data from any of the windows. Edit Menu The Edit menu contains commands for working with tables. Undo Undo may be used with desk accessories. Rest Prob Damage Criteria to defaults Results the probabilistic damage criteria to their default values. Note that a branch of the criteria tree may be saved in its own file by right-clicking on the branch folder in the Criteria dialog tree. results tables and graph window. Cut Cut may be used in the Report window but cannot be used on Hydromax drawing or data windows. Save Densities As Saves the Fluid densities table data. Exit Exit will close Hydromax and all the data windows. Page 200 . Print The Print command allows you to print the contents of the frontmost window on the screen. Load Densities Loads density table data previously saved from Hydromax – can be useful for synchronising the densities on several computers. Hydromax will ask you if you wish to save them before quitting. Page Setup The Page Setup dialog allows you to change page size and orientation for printing. which have not been saved to disk. including the design view. It is good practice to save the criteria library with each project in a project folder. see Density of Fluids on page 150. this is not normally necessary as this is done after any major changes to the criteria definition. input tables. but cannot be used on Hydromax drawing windows or data windows.

Graph or Results windows. Show Grid Toggle table grid lines in the Report. Select All Selects the entire Report. or the Report window. Cell Border Set Cell Border Width for a single cell or range of cells in the Report. Split Cell Split the currently selected cell into two separate cells in a table in the Report. Delete Cells Delete current cell. Merge Cells Merge the selected cells in a table into a single cell in the Report. otherwise all selected rows will be deleted. Add The Add command is used to add an entry to the input tables (Load. Delete The Delete command will delete rows from the input tables. tank.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Paste Choose the Paste command to Paste data into the Loadcase window or other input tables. Table Performs operations on Hydromax's Report window. margin line point etc.). Insert Row Insert a new row into the current table in the Report. Fill Down Copies text in a table down a column like a spreadsheet. If no rows are selected. Paste cannot be used in the View. Insert New Table Create a new table in the Report. column or row or a range of cells. Cell Shading Set Cell Shading Percentage for a single cell or a range of cells in the Report. columns or rows in the Report. the last row in the window will be deleted. Row Positioning Set Justification for the current table row or an entire table in the Report. Sort Items Sorts the selected rows in the Loadcase window Page 201 .

Activate / Deactivate GHS Export This command activates the GHS Import command in the File menu if a Hydrolink License is available. Also see: Tolerances on page 146 Streaming results to Word on page 155. Page 202 . Rotate Activates the Rotate command. View Menu The View menu contains commands for controlling the views in the graphics windows.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Move Items Up Moves the selected rows up (if possible) in the Loadcase and Compartment definition tables. Preferences The Hydromax preferences dialog allows you to set your analysis tolerances (or: error values) and select the option to stream the report to a Microsoft Word document. Zoom The Zoom function allows you to examine the contents of the design view windows in detail by enlarging the selected area to fill the screen. and Pan to arrange the view. Move Items Down Moves the selected rows down (if possible) in the Loadcase and Compartment definition tables. Home View Choosing Home View will set the image back to its Home View size. It can also be used to release the Hydrolink license – a restart of Hydromax will be required for this to take effect. which is a virtual trackball which lets you freely rotate a design in the Perspective view window. Pan Choosing Pan allows you to move the image around within the View window. To set the Home View. Shrink Choosing Shrink will reduce the size of the displayed image in the design view windows by a factor of two. Set Home View Choosing Set Home View allows you to set the Home View in the View window. use Zoom. Shrink. Add Surface Areas This command automatically adds the surface areas and centres of gravity of all hull surfaces into the current loading condition. This is useful for estimating the initial weight of hull plating. then select Set Home View from the View menu.

and Results windows. In general it is best to use a neutral background such as mid grey or dull blue and use lighter or darker shades of a colour rather than fully saturated hues. Graph.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Colours and lines The Colours and lines function allows you to set the colour and thickness of the lines. Remember to always be careful when using colour. When Loadcase window is frontmost. Font Font command allows you to set the size and style of text. Assembly Show or hide the assembly tree view. select the item whose colour you wish to change. To Change the thickness select the thickness from the drop down list. Status Bar Allows you to turn the Status Bar on and off at the bottom of the screen. and graphs. labels. To change the colour click in the box and select a new colour from the palette. Toolbar Allows you to turn the Toolbars on and off. Colours for the loadcase items can be set. The text style chosen will affect the display and printing of all text in the Report. See Loadcase Colour Formatting on page 44. Page 203 . The item‟s current colour will be displayed on the left of the dialog. which may be used to view parameters of selected objects (such as tanks). It is very easy to get carried away with bright colours and end up with a garish display that is uncomfortable to work with. From the scrollable list. Properties Displays the properties sheet. Curve of Areas. Loadcase.

) Max. opened and closed through the file menu. when running Probabilistic damage analysis. temporary damage conditionas are created automatically. Analysis Menu The Analysis menu can be used to change the current analysis mode. (This is only required if you want to manually recreate some or all of the Proabilistic damage analysis conditions. Page 204 .Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Full Screen Maximises screen usage. Loadcases are created. It also contains commands to set the input data and analysis settings and environment options required for the current analysis. Create cases from Zone Damage Automatically creates damage cases based on the zones that have been defined for Probabilistic damage analysis. number of Loadcases Specify the number of loadcase tabs – this requires a restart to activate the changes made. the zone or sub-zone). See Working with Loadcases on page 38. Add Damage case Add another damage case Delete Damage case Delete the selected damage cases Edit Damage case Edit the properties of the selected damage case Extent of Damage Automatically finds the breached tanks and compartments due to a cuboid extent of damage (or in the case of Probabilisitic damage. Case Menu Commands associated with the Loadcases and Damage cases Edit Loadcase Edit the properties of the current Loadcase (name and whether it is a loadcase or Loadgroup).

Permeability The range of permeabilities used for the Floodable Length analysis are set using this command. Specified Condition Allows you to specify Heel.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Note: It is good practice when preparing to run analysis to work down the Analysis menu starting at the top and checking all of the settings and environment options. Density This command allows you to set the density of fluids used in the analysis. Separate ranges are used for Large Angle Stability. See Fluids Analysis Methods on page 148. The vertical centre of gravity to be used for KN and Floodable Length analyses is specified here. free-to-trim to loadcase. Draft The range of drafts used for the analysis of upright hydrostatics can be set using this command. KN and Limiting KG analyses. Displacement The range of displacements used for the analysis of KN values. CG. See Density on page 150. Heel Selecting Heel allows you to specify the three ranges of heel angles that you wish Hydromax to step through. Waveform The Waveform command allows you to perform analysis for a flat waterplane or sinusoidal or trochoidal waveforms. Fluids Allows you to specify whether to use Corrected VCG method or Simulate Fluid Movement method when treating the fluid contained in slack tanks. This can be fixed trim. Limiting KG and Floodable Length can be set using this command. Trim. KG for the upright hydrostatics is also specified in this dialog. free-to-trim specifying initial trim value and free-totrim specifying LCG position. Displacement and Draft for the Specified Condition analysis. Calibration Options Specify whether compartments and non-buoyant volumes should also be calibrated. Page 205 . Trim Allows the specification of the trimming mode to be used for the analysis. MARPOL Options Select MARPOL Regulation and specify which tanks should be incuded in the MARPOL oil outflow analysis.

This allows you to specify which criteria will be checked during the analysis. or if you wish to modify whether skin thickness or trimming options are applied. See Criteria on page 163. tank and compartment sections and recalculates them from the hull surface data and compartment definition. It then updates the loadcase with the correct capacities and free surface moments for the tanks. Note: To be able to update the Hydromax model to changes made in Maxsurf see Updating the Hydromax Model on page 26 for a step-by-step procedure you can follow. Grounding Specifies grounding on one or two points of variable length for use with the Equilibrium and Longitudinal Strength analyses. the criteria command will bring up a Floodable Length Criteria dialog with criteria that only apply to floodable length analysis. Page 206 . ensuring that the margin line follows the hull shape precisely. Also see: Margin Line Points on page 76. This command also updates the loadcase. Set Analysis Type Choose the analysis type you wish to use from the sub-menu. If any of the tank boundaries are made up from boundary surfaces. Snap Margin Line to Hull Project all of the margin line points horizontally onto the hull surface. When the floodable length analysis is selected.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Criteria The criteria menu item will bring up the criteria dialog. Recalculate Hull Sections Deletes all existing hull. Also recalculates totals and subsubtotals after a row sorting or moving command. if you wish to recalculate at a different precision. Update Loadcase Checks for changed tanks and makes sure that any tanks and compartments that have not been formed are correctly calculated. it is better to use “Recalculate Hull Sections” after re-opening the Maxsurf model to make sure the latest internal structure surfaces are being used as well. This is particularly useful if the underlying Maxsurf model has been modified. Also see: Tank Loads on page 46 Recalculate Tanks and Compartments Forces all tanks and compartments to be re-formed from their initial definition.

Hydrostatic results Data format dialog Used to select display options for Criteria results: Page 207 . Resume Analysis may be used to restart the calculation from the point where it was interrupted. A dialog box allows you to choose from a range of stability variables. Display Menu The Display menu contains commands for controlling the data. Note that the analysis may not have been completed and in the case of large angle stability. Equilibrium and Specified Condition). Data Format Data Format allows you to choose which data are tabulated and graphed (Upright Hydrostatics. any data displayed for the final iteration may be incorrect. equilibrium condition and KN values. Stability. Resume Analysis If you have halted analysis by choosing Stop Analysis. which are displayed in the graphics and other windows.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Start Analysis Selecting Start Analysis causes Hydromax to start performing the specified analysis. Results are written to a tab delimited text file as specified by the user at the start of the analysis. Stop Analysis This command halts the analysis at the current iteration. also. This should be turned on before commencing the analysis to ensure that results are added to the report when the analysis is completed. The analysis may be halted at any time by choosing Stop Analysis from this menu. Start Batch Analysis Hydromax will run the selected analyses for all combinations of load and damage cases using the batch processing command. Spool to Report Send the results of the analysis to the report upon completion. See Setting the Data Format on page 185.

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Criteria table Data format dialog Used to select which columns are displayed in the Loadcase window: Loadcase Data format dialog When the Max. Safe heeling angle angles graph is shown as a result of a Large Angle Stability analysis the Data Format dialog may be used to customise the graph layout: Page 208 .

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Max safe heeling angle Data format dialog May be used to customise the Floodable length graph: Floodable length Data format dialog Set Vessel to DWL Rotates the vessel back to upright and to DWL after an analysis has been completed (or Select View from Data used). and other items in the design view may be set by using this dialog. Select View from Data This function may be used to synchronise the display in the Design View window with one of the sets of data in Results window. not for tanks with the vessel at the final heel and trim of the last analysis. This is to ensure that tank data in the Loadacase are for the vessel in the upright condition. the Loadcase will not update while editing – only when start another analysis). The view may be set from any of the results from Upright Hydrostatics. hull contours. Page 209 . Prob damage zones Toggle the visibility of the probabilistic damage zones. compartments. Simply highlight the column or row that corresponds to the condition you wish to view and select “Select View From Data”. Visibility The visibility of tanks. This is required for automatic update of the Loadcase (note that if you do not rotate back to the DWL. the Design View will change to match the condition in the selected row or column in the Results window. Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analyses. labels.

Set Image Reference Point Sets the image reference point. Also see: Show Single Hull Section on page 30 Page 210 . The grid can only be displayed when the vessel is in upright position on its design waterline. a trimmed state at the end of an equilibrium analysis.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Individual Loadcase masses Toggle the visibility of the individual mass items in the current loadcase. Alternatively. Hide Image Hides the background image in the current view window. Tools for positioning and scaling the background image are also here. Switching analysis type puts the boat back into upright position on its design waterline. Show Image Shows the image in the current view window. Delete Image Deletes the background image in the current view window. Delete DXF background Deletes the DXF background. as well as a control box. Show DXF Shows the DXF background. This command is not available for images in the perspective window. similar to the one in Maxsurf. The option to display the grid will be greyed out when the ship is currently displayed in. This allows you to rapidly step through the hull sections from bow to stern.. Show Single Hull Section in Body Plan Selecting the Show Single Hull Section item from the Display menu will change the display in the Body Plan window to show only one section through the hull. Set Image Zero Point Sets the image zero point. in the top right corner of the window. Design Grid The grid submenu allows you to hide the grid or show the grid with or without station grid labels. The background may be loaded from an existing DXF file using the Import function in the File menu. The commands in the submenu are only available when a background image or DXF has been imported. See the Maxsurf manual for more details Hide DXF Hides the DXF background. for example. Background Controls whether the background DXF construction lines and the background images are displayed or not. the section chosen can be changed by pressing the left or right cursor keys on your keyboard. The section being displayed can be chosen by clicking on the section indicators at the top of the control box.

Clicking the mouse button will terminate the animation. When Hydromax has finished calculating the frames the sequence may be replayed by moving the mouse from side to side. You may set the initial viewing position in the Perspective View window using the Pitch. See Customising Coefficients on page 36 for more information. If animation is chosen after an Equilibrium Analysis has been performed in waves. through the range of heel angles specified. may also be set.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Render When the Perspective window is the current view for the model the Render option may be toggled on and off to render the surfaces. Coefficients Allows you to customise how you wish to calculate the coefficients as well as the display format for the LCB and LCF. Page 211 . For example. units for speed (used in wind heeling and heeling due to high-speed turn etc. Hold the shift key down while selecting the command to save the animation. criteria) and the angular units to be used for areas under GZ curves. Selecting Animate will animate the stability sequence in the design View window. Render Transparent makes the hull surfaces of the model semi transparent so that the rendered tanks and compartments within the model may be viewed. Design Grid Access to the Design Grid is intended for information only. Animate This command is available for any analysis that steps through several steps. when a waveform has been specified and an equilibrium analysis is selected or after a Large Angle Stability analysis over a heeling range. Frame of Reference Access to the Frame of Reference is intended for information only. Render Transparent When the Perspective window is the current view for the model the Render Transparent option may be toggled on and off. See Setting Units on page 37 for more information. Data Menu Units The units used may be specified using the Units command. the animation will automatically cycle through the full range of wave phases. In addition to the length and mass units classes. Roll and Yaw indicators. You are not expected to change the Design Grid in Hydromax. You are not expected to change the Frame of Reference in Hydromax. giving a simple visual simulation of the motion of the hull through the wave. The angular units for measuring heel and trim angles are always degrees.

Tile Horizontal Layout all visible windows across the screen. Results Choose from the Results item to bring the desired Results window to the front and display the desired table. depending on which analysis mode is currently active. This will ensure that a consistent frame of reference is used in all the programs. Loadcase Brings the Loadcase window to the front. Input Choose from the Input item to bring the desired Input window to the front and display the Compartment Definition. Selecting the item brings the appropriate window to the front. Window Menu For the items in this menu. KN and Equilibrium analysis. The selected design window will then be brought to the front. The Loadcase window allows you to enter a series of component weights.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference If the position(s) of the Baseline and/or Perpendiculars need to be changed from those defined in the Maxsurf model. It is highly recommended that the correct frame of reference be set in Maxsurf prior to loading the design into Hydromax. These inputs are used to calculate the total Displacement and Centre of Gravity for Stability. Tile Vertical Layout all visible windows down the screen. each represents a Hydromax window. Page 212 . Hydromax Help Invokes Hydromax Help. Help Menu Provides access to Hydromax Help. Cascade Displays all the Windows behind the active Windows. Arrange Icons Rearranges the icons of any iconised window so that they are collected together at the bottom of the Maxsurf program window. See: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18. they may be changed using the Frame of Reference command. together with their longitudinal and vertical distances from the zero point. Margin Line Points or Modulus table. View Direction Select the desired view direction from the sub-menu. Graph Brings the selected Graph window to the front. Key Points. The Graph window displays a number of different graphs.

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Hydromax Automation Reference Invokes the Automation Reference help system. Page 213 . About Hydromax Displays information about the current version of Hydromax you are using. Check for Updates Provides access to our website with the most recent version listed. Online Support Provides access to a wide range of support resources available on the internet.

) is achieved in Hydromax. AM. World or trimmed frame of reference The “world” or “trimmed” reference frame is that of the trimmed vessel. Here the baseline is horizontal and the perpendiculars are vertical. However. these axis systems are no longer parallel. CP. static waterline and “vertical” measurements are perpendicular to the waterline Rotated reference frame (red) and measurements in the two reference frames: Measurements in the upright vessel reference frame (green) and trimmed reference frame (blue) When the vessel is upright (zero trim and zero heel) these axis systems are parallel. “Longitudinal” measurements are made parallel to the baseline and “vertical” measurements are perpendicular to the baseline. “Longitudinal” measurements are made parallel to the horizontal. there are two frames of reference: Ship or upright frame of reference The “ship” or “upright” reference frame is that of the upright vessel with zero-trim. However if the vessel is trimmed or heeled or rotated in both directions simultaneously. Page 214 . because Hydromax treats trim exactly (the hull is rotated not sheared when trim occurs).Appendix A Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters This Appendix explains how the calculation of form parameters (CB. Definition and calculation of form parameters Below is a summary of the definitions of basic vessel particulars and form parameters used in Hydromax. and investigates why differences with other hydrostatics packages may occur. Here the baseline is no longer horizontal and neither are the perpendiculars vertical. etc. Measurement Reference Frames Results in Hydromax are given from the vessel‟s zero point.

Measurements such as BM. GM. Similarly. GM is the true vertical separation of the metacentre and the centre of gravity with the vessel inclined and are always measured normal to the water surface. It is for this reason that. then there will be a sin(trim angle) term introduced. in generally for the vessel to be in equilibrium. Thus the metacentre is always vertically (in the earth-fixed axis system) above the centre of buoyancy by a distance BM = I / vol where I is the second moment of area of the waterplane.Appendix A Ship-Fixed and Earth-Fixed(world) axis systems The majority of measurements are given in the “ship” frame of reference.e. These include longitudinal centres of gravity. The same is true of TCB and TCG if the vessel is heeled. Page 215 . and measurements from the keel such as KB and KG. are measured in the “world” frame of reference. LCB). LCG is not equal to LCB – if both LCB and LCG are measured in the ship-axis system (of course if they are measured in the earthfixed axis system then they are the same. i. LCF. that are explicitly vertical. and only if the vessel is upright are the axis systems parallel and hence the equation holds). in general. floatation and buoyancy (LCG. This is because if the vessel is trimmed and if the VCG and VCB are not the same. KM is not equal to KB+BM (BM is in a different axis system to KB and KM.

Longitudinal Centre of Gravity. measured normal to the baseline. These can be modified in the Data | Coefficients dialog shown below: Page 216 . measured in upright reference frame. Distance from keel (baseline) to centre of gravity.Appendix A Nomenclature Amax Ams A AWP BOA BWL B b GM KB KG LOA LCB LCF LCG LWL LBP L T0 T t Maximum immersed cross-sectional area to waterline under investigation Immersed cross-sectional area to waterline under investigation amidships Immersed cross-section area: Amax or Ams as selected by user Area of waterplane at the waterline under investigation Overall beam of whole vessel (above and below waterline) Maximum waterline beam at design waterline Maximum beam of waterline under investigation Waterline beam of station under investigation Metacentric height: vertical distance from centre of gravity to metacentre. measured normal to the baseline. Length overall Longitudinal Centre of Buoyancy. measured in the trimmed reference frame Distance from keel (baseline) to centre of buoyancy. measured in upright reference frame. Longitudinal Centre of Floatation. parallel to baseline. measured in upright reference frame. Length of design waterline Length between perpendiculars length of waterline under investigation Draft from some arbitrary baseline (normally the lowest point on the design) Maximum immersed depth (draft) of hull Draft (immersed depth) of station under investigation Immersed volume of displacement at waterline under investigation Coefficient parameters There are several options for calculating hullform coefficients. parallel to baseline. parallel to baseline.

In addition. or possibly the transom. The after perpendicular is normally defined as the position of the rudder post. Prismatic and Waterplane Area Coefficients. particularly for resistance prediction purposes. The forward perpendicular is normally defined as the intersection of the DWL with the bow. LWL and LOA quite different. Some of the more common lengths that may be used to characterise a vessel.Appendix A Length The datum/design waterline or DWL is a waterline near which the fully loaded design is intended to float under normal circumstances. In Hydromax you may choose between the length between perpendiculars and the waterline length for the calculation of Block. it may be more appropriate to define an effective length of the underwater body. In some cases. this may be different from the length of the DWL (LWL) and in general. for calculations at drafts other than the DWL. it may be appropriate to use the actual waterline length at that draft (L). Several lengths may be defined: the LBP is the length between perpendiculars. features such as bulbous bows and overhangs can make the LBP. Select Coefficients from the Display menu: Page 217 . will also be different from the LOA (overall length).

in others. and this may be of the DWL or the waterline under consideration. Hydromax uses the total waterline beam of immersed portions of the section for calculation of block coefficient and other form parameters. there may be times when it is appropriate to use the maximum immersed beam (e. For the calculation of section area coefficients it is normal practice to use the beam and draft of the section in question. For catamarans this will be twice the demihull beam (remember that the total displaced volume is used and hence the block coefficient is the same as that of a single demihull). the beam used would be the sum of B1. Vessel with tumble-home Catamarans and other multihull vessels pose another difficulty. However. For the case of a monohull this will be the normal waterline beam. vessel with tumble-home or blisters). For the section shown below. you can select various beams: Page 218 .Appendix A Beam It is normal to use the maximum waterline beam for calculation of coefficients. In some cases the overall beam is of importance. the beam of the individual hulls may be required. B2 and B3. Multihull beams You may choose which beam should be used from the following list: In the reported hydrostatics. submarine.g.

However. For a catamaran this would be from the outside of the port demihull to the outside of the starboard demihull. The other beam values are calculated by summing the breadth of waterline crossings as described above. However. Normally this datum is the lowest part of the upright hull. for vessels with raked keel lines or yachts. however. the datum may be elsewhere. this is often the case when form parameters are calculated. there are also occasions when the immersed depth of the section is a more relevant measure of draft. but for a multihull. For a monhull without tunnels. In Hydromax drafts are defined from the datum line. this will be the same as the extents value. It should be noted that the section area will. Draft The draft is normally specified from a nominal datum. Hydromax uses the depths that stations extend below the waterline for calculation of form coefficients. You may select which depth should be used for the calculation of form parameters. including the option of measuring the draft to the baseline – this gives the option of ignoring appendages such as fin keels when determining the draft to be used to calculate the form parameter (if the baseline is defined to the bottom of the canoe body for example).: Page 219 .Appendix A Calculated beams The values “Beam extents” are those that measure the beam across the maximum port and starboard extents of the vessel. Both depths are measured in upright position. this would simply be the distance from the port side to the starboard side. it will be less than the extents value. include the appendages. For a monhull. Hydromax uses these values for computing coefficients.

the position midway between the perpendiculars is defined as midships. It is for this reason that as the heel approaches 90degrees. Page 220 . the section with greatest cross-sectional area may also be of particular interest. Draft measured along the inclined perpendicular lines Immersed depth and Draft measurements The images below show the difference between the draft measurements (which are made in the inclined centreline plane of the vessel) and the immersed depth measurements (which are made normal to the free-surface). In Hydromax.Appendix A Draft measurements Draft measurement at heel angle When the vessel is heeled. Difference between “Immersed depth” and “Draft” measurements Midship and Max Area Sections It is current usual practice to define the midship section as midway between the perpendiculars. the draft is measured through the intersection of the upright waterline and the centreline. For vessels with no parallel mid-body. however for some vessels it is defined as the midpoint of the DWL. the draft becomes very large. perpendicular to the heeled waterline (see figure below). Essentially the draft is measured along the heeled and trimmed perpendiculars on the centreline.

The beam may be at amidships or the maximum moulded beam of the waterline. LWL or some effective length. The section area coefficient used by Hydromax. is calculated at either the station with maximum cross-sectional area or the midship section area (as defined in the Coefficients dialog). CB L B T Section Area Coefficient Principles of Naval Architecture defines the midship coefficient as: "The ratio of the immersed area of the midship station to that of a rectangle of breadth equal to moulded breadth and depth equal to moulded draft at amidships. Block Coefficient Principles of Naval Architecture defines the block coefficient as: "the ratio of the volume of displacement of the moulded form up to any waterline to the volume of a rectangular prism with length. breadth and depth equal to the length. the actual definitions of the length. you may select which section area should be used: Hydromax uses the station with the maximum immersed cross-sectional area at the waterline under consideration. breadth and mean draft of the ship at that waterline. In Hydromax midships is midway between the perpendiculars. Options for Section area coefficient CM A b t Prismatic Coefficient Principles of Naval Architecture defines the prismatic coefficient as: Page 221 .Appendix A When computing form coefficients. Length may be LBP. Hydromax uses the length beam and draft as selected in the Coefficients dialog to compute the block coefficient. The beam used is that obtained by summing the immersed waterline crossings of the specified section. for sections that have significant tumble-home or blisters below the waterline." However. or may be defined according to another standard – this may be important for hulls with significant tumble-home or blisters below the waterline. The beam and immersed depth of the selected section is used unless the draft to baseline option has been selected in which case this draft is used." It should be noted that. such as CP and CM. the midship section coefficient can be greater than unity. beam and draft used vary between authorities.

When the vessel is free-to-trim. the LCG and LCB will be at the same longitudinal position in the global coordinate system." Hydromax uses the length and beam as selected. but not in the frame of reference. see Measurement Reference Frames on page 214. This is explained in the figure below: Effect of vertical separation of CG and CB on LCG and LCB measured in the Ship reference frame Page 222 . Therefore a difference between the LCG and the LCB value will occur when the vessel is trimmed. See Customising Coefficients on page 36 for more information. CP L A Waterplane Area Coefficient Principles of Naval Architecture defines the waterplane area coefficient as: "The ratio between the area of the waterplane and the area of a circumscribing rectangle. Hydromax uses the selected length and the selected immersed cross-section area Amax or Ams.Appendix A "The ratio between the volume of displacement and a prism whose length equals the length of the ship and whose cross-section equals the midship section area." Again the definition of midship section and vessel length depend on the standard being used. The LCG and LCB are calculated in the “ship” or “upright” frame of reference. CWP AWP L B LCG and LCB Hydromax allows you to fully customise how you want to display the LCB and LCF values.

Appendix A Note: LCG and LCB are calculated in the vessels‟ frame of reference and therefore will have different longitudinal positions when the vessel is trimmed then for when it is upright. Trim angle The trim angle as defined by: tan 1 Ta Tf L pp where: is the trim angle. Tf are the aft and forward drafts at the corresponding perpendiculars and LPP is the length between perpendiculars. MTc or MTi The required moment to make the vessel trim one unit-length. Page 223 . Ta . Immersion The weight required to sink the model one unit-length below its current waterline. assuming the deck inclination is zero when the vessel is in upright position. Deck camber and initial deck slope are not taken into account. The unitlength can be either in cm or inch depending on your unit settings. That can be either cm or inch depending on your unit settings. This is the same for differences in TCG and TCB values due to heeling. For example: The Max deck inclination is the maximum slope of the deck when combining the trim and heel angle of the vessel. Maximum deck inclination The inclination angle is a combination of heel and trim angle. Hydromax calculates the steepest slope of the deck when the ship is trimmed and/or heeled.

the error due to integrating girths along the vessel length cannot be removed simply by increasing the number of integration stations.5% error discrepancy noted above. Where there are large changes in shape. The integration method used: trapezium. and hence the 2 2 R2 integration of section girths underestimates by error factor of 4/ 1. and most automatic calculations carried out by computers. and their distribution. or higher order methods. Page 224 2 . It may be shown that the area obtained by integrating the girth of the sphere along its length is given by: R2 . These mainly occur from the integration method used. it may seem that wetted surface area may be calculated by simply integrating the station girth along the length of the hull. the accuracy increases as the step size is reduced. Simpson. this is primarily due to differences in the definitions used – see discussion above. Both methods use numerical integration techniques. in general. As with all numerical integration schemes. However. agreement of hand calculations to within 2% is considered good). In general. This is given analytically by: A 2 R 2 . and occur in both hand calculations. The 0. Different number of integration stations used.5% (note that. such as near the bow and stern.5 2 R 2 A' approximately 27%. with computer calculations. The differences are easily shown by considering the surface area of half a sphere. and the wetted surface area can only be accurately found by summing elemental areas over the complete surface. it is normal to use perhaps 21 sections and perhaps 3-5 significant figures. hence computer calculations offer an enormous advantage compared with hand calculations. where R is the radius of the circle. However. note that this is with an infinite number of integration steps. this is not the case. in a similar way that one might integrate the station cross-sectional area along the length of the hull to obtain the volume. calculated by RM Displ *GMt * sin(1) Potential for errors in hydrostatic calculations There are a number of potential sources of error when calculating the hydrostatic properties of immersed shapes. it is quite feasible to use 200 sections or more with 10s of significant figures. Differences in derived form parameters may show considerable variation. These effects are noted from comparing the results of different hydrostatics packages on the same hullform. Differences in the hull definition. The only accurate numerical method is to sum the areas of individual triangles interpolated on the parametric surface. due to the increased speed and accuracy with which these calculations may be carried out. are under 0. or 0. and number of interpolation points used to define each section.Appendix A RM at 1 deg The righting Moment at 1 degree heel angle.27 . Further. This can be of particular importance if the waterline intersects the stem profile between two sections. differences for basic parameters such as displacement etc. may be attributed to a number of causes: Convergence limits when balancing a hull to a specified displacement or centre of gravity. Integration of wetted surface area At first glance. If the surface is exported as DXF poly-lines then the precision used and the number of straight-line sections used to make up the poly-line are important. With hand calculations. the stations should be more closely spaced. which are normally either based on Simpson's rule or the Trapezium rule.

Page 225 . will be subject to the error described above. which use a number of vertical stations to define the hull.Appendix A However. Surface areas calculated by the 'Calculate Areas' dialog in Maxsurf are the most accurate. Those calculated by Hydromax and most other hydrodynamics packages. since they are derived from the actual parametric definition of the surface. for normal ship hulls the differences will be much less. due to the greatly reduced longitudinal curvature.

0 0. The typical format of the file is given below: Please refer to the file C:\Program Files\Maxsurf\HMCriteriaHelp\CriteriaHelp. The file is a normal PC text file.rtf true STIX input data true false false GreaterThan false true false false false true true 0.hcr. Hydromax Criteria File [units] LengthUnits = m MassUnits = tonne SpeedUnits = kts AngleUnits = deg GZAreaGMAngleUnits = deg [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = Specific Criteria ParentGroupName = root [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = My Custom Criteria ParentGroupName = root [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = STIX input data ParentGroupName = Specific Criteria [end] [criterion] Type RuleName CritName CritInfo CritInfoFile Locked GroupName TestIntact TestDamage Test Compare UseLoHeel UseEquilibrium UseHiHeel UseFirstPeak UseMaxGZ UseFirstDF UseVanishingStab LoHeel HiHeel RequiredValue [end] = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CTStdAreaUnderGZBetweenLimits STIX input data GZ area to the lesser of downflooding or… Area under GZ curve between specified heel… HMCriteriaHelp\StixHelp.html for a full list of all the parameters for all the different criteria types.0 30. which may be edited manually so as to generate custom criteria.000 Page 226 .Appendix B Appendix B: Criteria file format The criteria are saved in a Hydromax criteria file with the extension .

0 The file must have “Hydromax Criteria File” in the first row.g. The common parameters for all criteria are as follows: Type Describes the type of criterion RuleName Text which specifies the rule to which the criterion belongs CritName Text which specifies the criterion‟s name CritInfo Verbose description of the criterion Locked Whether the criterion may be edited in Hydromax or not. The criteria then appear after the units section and as many criteria as required may be included.Appendix B [criterion] Type RuleName CritName CritInfo CritInfoFile Locked GroupName TestIntact TestDamage Test Compare RequiredValue [end] = = = = = = = = = = = = CTStdAngleOfVanishingStab STIX input data Angle of vanishing stability Calculates the angle of vanishing stability… HMCriteriaHelp\StixHelp. e. If Locked is set to true. The first section of the file is the units section and this specifies the units that are to be used in the file. There are two angular units: AngleUnits Specifies the units for angular measurements. range of stability GZAreaGMAngleUnits Specifies the angle units used for area under GZ graph and for GM. it is not possible to edit the criterion‟s parameters in Hydromax The other parameters that may be set depend on the criterion type. Page 227 .rtf true STIX input data true false false GreaterThan 0.

This allows for complex calculations to be cross referenced into criteria. In this section: Parent Calculations Minimum GM Calculators Parent Heeling Arms Parent Heeling Moments Parent Stability Criteria For all general help on criteria or working with the criteria dialog. Selecting a calculation in a criterion Using a calculation in a criterion is very similar to using a heel arm: Define your custom calculation by copying it from the parent list.com with details of the required calculations. you should make a copy of the parent calculation by dragging it to your custom criteria folder. severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion. please contact support@formsys. see Chapter 4 Stability Criteria on page 163. In the criterion select the required calculation from the pull down list: Angle calculators These calculators produce an angular measurement and may be referenced by the following criteria: Criteria that currently support roll-back angle calculations Heeling arm criteria (xRef) Combined Page 228 Ratio of areas type 2 Combined criteria (ratio of areas XRefHeelRatioOfAreas2 XRefHeelGenericWindHeeling . Currently this has only been implemented for the IMO roll-back angle calculation used in the IMO code on Intact Stability. This information can also be found in the lower right of the Criteria Dialog in the Criteria Help section.Appendix F Appendix C: Criteria Help In this Appendix all individual Parent Criteria are explained in detail. Parent Calculations Special calculations are provided for some criteria parameters. and the IMO required GM for vessels carrying grain in bulk. The parent calculations are listed above the parent heeling arms: Parent calculations in Hydromax Criteria dialog As with other criteria and heeling arms. If there are any other calculations that you would like implemented.

general wind heeling arm Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) . The input parameters may be specified by the user or calculated by Hydromax for the vessel in the upright condition for the current loadcase. The method used for the k-factor can be one of three options: “Round bilge: k = 1.23(59). “Sharp bilge: k = 0.25 B 0.7” or “Tabulated value for k” – these are auto completed so you only need to type the first letter.wind heeling arm CritHeelWindHeeling IMO roll-back angle calculator The IMO roll back angle calculator calculates the roll back angle as per the severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion as defined in the IMO Code on Intact Stability.749(18) and MSC.Appendix B heeling arm criteria (xRef) Heeling arm criteria (stand alone) Heeling arm.general wind heeling arm CritHeelRatioOfAreas2 CritHeelGenericWindHeeling Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) . combined criteria (stand alone) Heeling arm.267(85). Input parameters for: IMO roll-back angle calculation GM calculators These calculators produce a GM measurement and may be referenced by the following criteria: Criteria that currently support roll-back angle calculations GZ curve criteria Value of GMt at (calc) CTStdValueOfGMAt Minimum GM calculator – Grain The required GM for vessels carrying grain.645 B Vd 0. This calculation follows the function defined in the Intact Stability codes A. as defined in IMO Resolution MSC. is calculated as follows: GM L B Vd 0.0”. combined criteria (stand alone) type 2) Ratio of areas type 2 . The block coefficient is calculated with the current user settings for length and beam (not necessarily the waterline beam which another parameter required for the calculation).0875 SF Where (using consistent units): L is the combined length of all full compartments Page 229 .

005 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. 170. H is the height of the assumed centre of lateral resistance of the vessel.170: service on partially protected water: k0 = 0.170: ocean service: k0 = 0.0025 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0.0033 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0.055 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t For CFR 46.028 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t Page 230 . Δ is the vessel displacement 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle A is the windage area which may be specified as a total area or as an area additional to the area of the hull above the waterline. for example: For CFR 46.036 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t For CFR 46. 170. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Wind pressure The GM required to withstand wind pressure is calculated as follows: k0 GM L k1 2 A(h H ) cos n ( 0 ) sin( 0 ) Where (using consistent units): L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value directly rather than having it calculated by Hydromax. 170. h is height of the centroid of A above the zero point.170: service on protected water: k0 = 0. k0 and k1 are constants.Appendix F B is the moulded breadth of the vessel SF is the stowage factor Vd is the calculated average void depth Δ is the vessel displacement Input parameters for: Grain heeling min.

required GM Minimum GM calculator – Constant The required GM is calculated as follows: GM a cos n ( 0 ) sin m ( 0 ) Where (using consistent units): a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used) 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle m. Input parameters for: Constant min. n are the exponents for sine and cosine. An example of where this calculation should be used is in CFR 46. 171. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Constant with freeboard The required GM is calculated as follows: GM a f B fa cos n ( 0 ) sin m ( 0 ) Page 231 Where (using consistent units): . n = 1. b is their average transverse location and K is the number of passengers per unit mass.Appendix B Input parameters for: Wind pressure min.050: GM Nb with a K tan( 0 ) Nb and m.0 K Where N is the number of passengers.

Appendix F a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used) B is the vessel beam f is the minimum freeboard for the upright (zero heel) condition to the deck-edge or marginline. and for the Old heeling arm criteria where the heeling arm is specified for each criterion separately. typically the breadth of the watertight trunk b0 is a constant with the same units as b b1 is a dimensionless constant If desired. Page 232 . there is a list of parent heeling arms. n are the exponents for sine and cosine. fa is the additional freeboard allowance calculated as follows (additionally the freeboard allowance may be limited to a maximum specified value): fa k h l L 2b b0 B b1 Where (using consistent units): L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value directly rather than having it calculated by Hydromax. typically the length of the watertight trunk b is a breadth. Parent Heeling Arms As with the criteria. from which custom heeling arms may be derived: Available heeling arms and moments To learn how to cross reference these heeling arms into criteria. typically the height of the watertight trunk l is a length. Heeling Arm Definition This section describes how to define heeling arms and is valid for both the parent heeling arms that can be cross referenced into the heeling arm criteria. a heel adjustment may be included: 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle m. please see Heeling arm criteria (xRef) on page 260. B is the same as that used in the expression for GM k is a dimensionless constant h is a height.

Same as for the Parent criteria. such as IMO Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) have a heeling arm of constant magnitude. this is the ratio of the magnitude of the wind heeling arm during a gust to the magnitude of the wind heeling arm under steady wind. Typically n=1 is used for passenger crowding and vessel turning since the horizontal lever for the passenger transverse location reduces with the cosine of the heel angle. Make sure you read Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. A is the magnitude of the heeling arm. They are defined below. some criteria. For wind n=2 is often used for heeling because both the projected area as well as the lever decrease with the cosine of the heel angle. cosn describes the shape of the curve. General heeling arm General heeling arm with gust General cos+sin heeling arm User Defined Heeling Arm Passenger crowding heeling arm Wind Turning Lifting heeling Towing heeling Forces heeling arm Trawling heeling arm Grain heeling arm Areas and leavers Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement Note: When you are working with the parent heeling arms. General heeling arm with gust Some criteria require a Gust Ratio. make sure you copy them into a custom heeling arms folder before editing them.Appendix B There are several heeling arms that are used for the criteria. H steady ( ) H gust ( ) A cosn ( ) A GustRatio cosn ( ) Page 233 . However. General heeling arm The general form of the heeling arm is given below: H( ) where: A cos n ( ) is the heel angle. in this case n=0 should be used. the Parent heeling arms will be reset to their default values each time you start up Hydromax. GustRatio H gust H steady Both the steady and the gust heel arm have the same shape.

These should be comma delimited for example <45 . notably lifting of weights.2 meters at 45 degrees angle of heel. User Defined Heeling Arm A user-defined heeling arm may be used in the criteria. (To aid input of the data. Some criteria specify the ratio of the wind speeds. D C tan( ) . that in this case. the ratio of the heel arms will be the square of the ratio of the wind speeds. A is the magnitude of the heeling arm.Appendix F where: is the heel angle.2> for a heeling arm magnitude of 1. It may be shown that this is equivalent to: H( ) where: k C cos( ) D sin( ) R2 1 tan 2 ( C ) . With the heeling arm. the number of points is specified and then for each point the angle and magnitude of the curve can be specified. if it is assumed that the wind pressure is proportional to the square of the wind seed. the user can specify the number of points and the shape of the heeling arm curve. this is taken as the magnitude – and the heel angle is left unchanged. if only one value is supplied it is taken as the heel angle – and the magnitude is left unchanged. the same heeling arm form may be used for computing towing heeling arms of the form: H( ) k A cos( ) B sin( ) in this case a constant angle (in the case of towing. It should be noted. Page 234 . 1.) A single coefficient may be adjusted and this is used as a multiplication factor (whist the shape of the curve remains unchanged). the angle of the tow above the horizontal) is included. R2 A2 B 2 and tan B A Make sure you read Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. require a heeling arm with both a sine and cosine component: H( ) k A cos n ( ) B sin m ( ) It should be noted that provided the indices are both unity. cosn describes the shape of the curve. and if a value preceded by a comma is given. First. General cos+sin heeling arm Some criteria. the definition of gust ratio is the ratio of the heeling arms. This heeling arm can then be cross-referenced into any of the heeling arm criteria.

the wind heeling arm is given by: Page 235 . the wind heeling arm is given by: Hw( ) a PA h H cosn ( ) g where: a is a constant.Appendix B Passenger crowding heeling arm The magnitude of the heel arm is given by: H pc ( ) where: n pas MD cosn ( ) n pas is the number of passengers M is the average mass of a single passenger D is the average distance of passengers from the vessel centreline is the vessel mass (same units as M ) The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option number of passengers: nPass passenger mass: M distance from centreline: D cosine power: n Wind heeling arm Description Number of passengers Units none Average mass of one passenger Average distance of the passengers from the centreline Cosine power for curve . theoretically unity A is the windage area at height h is the vessel mass P is the wind pressure H is the vertical centre of hydrodynamic resistance to the wind force In the case of the wind velocity based formulation.defines shape mass length none In the case of the wind pressure based formulation.

where ρair is the density of air and CD is an average drag coefficient for the windage area Pressure or Velocity (type “P” or “V”) Actual velocity of pressure . theoretically unity v is the vessel velocity Page 236 . an area to be added to the windage area computed by Hydromax based on the hull sections There are four options for specifying H (all options are calculated with the vessel upright at the loadcase displacement and LCG): User specified H is taken as half the mean draft. centre of projected lat. u'water area H = waterline cosine power: n Turning heeling arm Height of user defined total or additional windage area User may specify either a total windage area Or.defines shape length length length length none The magnitude of the heel arm is derived from the moment created by the centripetal force acting on the vessel during a high-speed turn and the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and hydrodynamic lateral resistance to the turn. Option constant: a Description Constant which may be used to modify the magnitude of the heel arm.Appendix F Hw( ) a v2 A h H cosn ( ) g where: a is now effectively an average drag coefficient for the windage area multiplied by the air density and has units of density v is the wind speed. The heeling arm is thus given by: Ht ( ) v2 a h cos n ( ) Rg where (in consistent units): a is a constant. normally unity for pressure based formulation or 0. H is taken as the waterline Cosine power for curve . And the other parameters are described as above. mass/length3 for velocity based formulation wind model wind pressure or velocity area centroid height: h total area: A additional area: A height of lateral resistance: H H = mean draft / 2 H = vert.depends on wind model mass/(time2 length) or length/ time length length2 length2 Units none for pressure based formulation. H is taken as the vertical centre of underwater lateral projected area. The heeling arm is obtained by dividing the heeling moment by the vessel weight.5 ρair CD for the velocity formulation.

position of G above baseline in upright condition h is taken as KG less half the mean draft. the vessel displacement remains constant. but there is an effective change of its centre of gravity. (The weight is lifted from a stowage position onboard the vessel by a crane on the vessel. as percentage of LWL Vertical lever: h Description Constant which may be used to modify the magnitude of the heel arm. centre of projected lat. as percentage of LWL There are four options for specifying h (all options are calculated with the vessel upright at the loadcase displacement and LCG): User specified h is taken as KG . as some criteria require.Appendix B R is the radius of the turn h is the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and lateral resistance The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option constant: a vessel speed: v turn radius: R turn radius.defines shape Units none length/time length % length h = KG h = KG . normally unity Vessel speed in turn Turn radius may be specified directly Or. h is taken as the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and underwater lateral projected area. i. u'water area cosine power: n Lifting heeling arm length length length none This is used to simulate the effect of lifting a weight from its stowage position.) The magnitude of the heel arm is given by: H lw ( ) M h cos( ) v sin( ) where: M is the mass of the weight being lifted h is horizontal separation of the centre of gravity of the weight in its stowage position and the suspension position (upper tip of lifting boom) v is vertical separation of the centre of gravity of the weight in its stowage position and the suspension position (upper tip of lifting boom) is the vessel mass (same units as M ) Page 237 .mean draft / 2 h = KG . R.vert.e. Cosine power for curve .

This value is positive if the towline is above the thrust centre. This value is positive if the offset is in the direction of the tow. such as those applied due fire-fighting or manoeuvring using thrusters.Appendix F Just before lifting the weight off the vessel’s deck The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option Mass being lifted: M vertical separation of suspension from stowage position: v Description Mass of weight being lifted Vertical separation of suspension point from weight‟s original stowage position on the vessel.defines shape Units force length length angle of tow above horizontal: tau cosine power: n Forces heeling arm angle none This heeling arm can be used to model up to two forces acting on the vessel forces. It is assumed that the towline is sufficiently long that this angle remains constant and does not vary as the vessel is heeled. Horizontal separation of suspension point (upper tip of lifting boom) from weight‟s original stowage position on the vessel This value is positive if the horizontal shift of the weight should produce a positive heeling moment. This value is positive if the suspension position (upper tip of lifting boom) is above the original stowage position. The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option tension or thrust: T vertical separation of propeller centre and tow attachment: v horizontal offset of tow attachment: h Description Tension in towline or vessel thrust Vertical separation tow attachment position from the vessel‟s vertical centre of thrust. h is horizontal offset of the tow attachment position from the vessel centreline v is vertical separation tow attachment position from the vessel‟s vertical centre of thrust is the vessel mass is the power index for the cosine term which may be used to change the shape of the heeling n arm curve is the (constant) angle of the towline above the horizontal. expressed as a force. Units mass length horizontal separation of suspension from stowage position: h length Towing heeling arm The magnitude of the heel arm is given by: H tow ( ) T v cosn ( g ) h sin( ) where: T is the tension in the towline or vessel thrust. Angle of tow above the horizontal Cosine power for curve . The magnitude of the heel arm is given by: Page 238 . Horizontal offset of the tow attachment position from the vessel centreline.

It is mirrored about the heel=0 axis and is not allowed to go below zero. not a mass. expressed as a force. y is the transverse distance of the line of action of the trawl wire from the vessel centreline n defines the shape of the heeling arm. B. is the vessel mass Grain heeling arm This heeling arm can be used model the effects of bulk grain shift as defined in IMO Resolution MSC.Appendix B H forces ( ) 1 A1 h1 g H cosn1 ( ) A2 h 2 H cosn2 ( ) where: A1 and A2 are two forces acting on the vessel. h1 and h2 are the vertical heights (from the zero point) at which these forces act. H is the assumed vertical position of the vessel‟s centre of lateral resistance (or the centre of rotation from which the forces are applied) is the vessel mass g is acceleration due to gravity Trawling heeling arm This heeling arm can be used model the effects of trawl net snagging as defined in Annex G of the Australian NSCV requirements: H trawling ( ) m y cosn ( ) m where: m is a mass parameter determined from the breaking load of the trawl gear and the downwards angle of the trawl net. λ0) Point B = ( 1 deg heel.23(59): The heeling arm is defined by a straight line through two points A.e the heeling arm magnitude is reduced by a factor α at a heel angle of line is given below: 1. α λ0) i. Point A = (0 deg heel. n1 and n2 define the shapes of the heeling arms created by the two forces. The equation of the H grain ( ) 0 1 abs (1 1 ) Page 239 .

Length. For these types of heeling arms you should use the various heeling moment curves that are available – see below: Heeling moment curves Parent Heeling Moments Heeling moments work the same way as the Minimum GM Calculations in that they can be cross referenced into criteria. The user may also specify additional areas and vertical centroids or the total areas and vertical centroids. only “Hull” surfaces are included in the calculation . is given by: 0 volHM StowFact Where: volHM is the assumed volumetric heeling moment due to transverse grain shift in units of Length3. Page 240 . In all cases the vertical centroids are given in the Maxsurf/Hydromax co-ordinate system. thus. The area is calculated from the hydrostatic sections used by Hydromax.. Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement Some heeling arm criteria are dependent on the displacement of the vessel for the calculation of the Heeling Arm. For example.e. wind heeling etc. K. The advantage of using heeling moments is that they provide a constant heeling moment (varying heeling arm) as the vessel displacement changes (due to different loadcases or during a limiting KG analysis). λ0. The vertical position of the keel.: from the model‟s vertical datum. increasing the number of sections will increase the accuracy of the area calculation. StowFact is the stowage factor in units of Length3/Mass. even if the baseline does not correspond to the physical bottom of the vessel. and is the vessel mass Areas and levers Some criteria require the evaluation of above and below water lateral projected areas and their vertical centroids. These are in addition to the existing specific heeling arm curves for passenger crowding.is manually calculated from: A .Appendix F The heeling arm magnitude at zero heel. further. i. is assumed to be at the baseline (as set up in the Frame of Reference dialog). the value “A” in: H( ) M A cos n ( ) . which take account of the vessel displacement as required. The lateral projected area and its centroid of area are calculated for the upright vessel (zero heel) at the draft and trim defined in the loadcase or trim dialog. where M = heeling moment Δ = displacement. positive upwards.“Structure” surfaces are ignored.

Typically n=1 is used for passenger crowding and vessel turning since the horizontal lever for the passenger transverse location reduces with the cosine of the heel angle. such as IMO Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) have a heeling arm of constant magnitude. require a heeling moment with both a sine and cosine component: H( ) where: k A cos n ( ) B sin m ( ) is the heel angle.Appendix B The following heeling moments are available in the Hydromax criteria dialog: General heeling moment General cos+sin heeling moment General heeling moment with gust User Defined Heeling Moment General heeling moment The general form of the heeling moment is given below. However. It should be noted that provided the n and m indices are both unity. cosn describes the shape of the curve.length) and (mass). (mass. D C tan( ). A is the magnitude of the heeling moment (mass. thus the vessel displacement A is the magnitude of the heeling arm (length). notably lifting of weights. General cos+sin heeling moment Some criteria. It allows you to specify a constant heeling moment as opposed to a constant heeling arm: H( ) where: A cos n ( ) is the heel angle. For wind n=2 is often used for heeling because both the projected area as well as the lever decrease with the cosine of the heel angle. R 2 A 2 B and 2 tan B A Page 241 . the same heeling moment form may be used for computing towing heeling moments of the form: H( ) k A cos( ) B sin( ) in this case a constant angle (in the case of towing. It may be shown that this is equivalent to: H( ) where: k C cos( ) D sin( ) C R2 1 tan 2 ( ) . some criteria. in this case n=0 should be used.length) and A and B the magnitudes of the cosine and sine components of the heeling moment A B the vessel displacement (mass). thus and are the magnitude of the heeling arm (length). the angle of the tow above the horizontal) is included.

Defining User Defined Heeling Moments works in much the same as for User Defined Heeling Arm. if it is assumed that the wind pressure is proportional to the square of the wind seed. the definition of gust ratio is the ratio of the heeling arms. Both the steady and the gust heel moment have the same shape. H steady ( ) H gust ( ) where: A A cos n ( ) GustRatio cos n ( ) is the heel angle. This heeling moment can then be linked into a Heeling arm criteria (xRef) for evaluation. Some criteria specify the ratio of the wind speeds. thus the vessel displacement A is the magnitude of the heeling arm (length). User Defined Heeling Moment With the User Defined Heeling Moment. GustRatio H gust H steady The general form of the heeling moment is given below.Appendix F General heeling moment with gust Some criteria require a Gust Ratio. cosn describes the shape of the curve. the user can specify the number of points and the shape of the heeling moment curve. It allows you to specify a constant heeling moment as opposed to a constant heeling arm. this is the ratio of the magnitude of the wind heeling arm during a gust to the magnitude of the wind heeling arm under steady wind. Option The angle of Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Heel Pitch MaxSlope Units deg Page 242 . the ratio of the heel arms will be the square of the ratio of the wind speeds. Trim or Slope at Equilibrium This criterion may be used to check the value of maximum Heel.length) and (mass). Parent Stability Criteria The parent criteria are divided up into different categories depending on their basic types. It should be noted. Criteria at Equilibrium These criteria are calculated after an equilibrium analysis and relate to the equilibrium position of the vessel after the analysis. Pitch or Maximum Slope (compared with an originally horizontal and flat deck). A is the magnitude of the heeling moment (mass. Maximum value of Heel. that in this case. The equilibrium criteria are only displayed in the report if you run an equilibrium analysis.

Value of GMT or GML at Equilibrium This criterion is used to check that the GM (transverse or longitudinal) exceeds a specified minimum value.Appendix B Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than Permissible value deg Minimum Freeboard at Equilibrium Checks whether the minimum freeboard is greater than a minimum required value. This could be used to check that an embarkation point is sufficiently close to the waterline. use a combination of both forms of the minimum/maximum freeboard criteria. Page 243 . are calculated from the Large Angle Stability analysis in Hydromax. Option The value of Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Marginline DeckEdge DownfloodingPoints PotentialDfloodingPoints EmbarkationPoints ImmersionPoints Permissible value Units length Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than length To check that the freeboard lies within a specified range. Option The value of Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Marginline DeckEdge DownfloodingPoints PotentialDfloodingPoints EmbarkationPoints ImmersionPoints Permissible value Units length Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than length Maximum Freeboard at Equilibrium Check that the maximum freeboard is less than a maximum required value. Option The value of Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): GMtransverse GMlongitudinal) Permissible value Units length Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than length GZ Curve Criteria (non-heeling arm) These criteria. This could be used to check margin line or downflooding point immersion. calculated from the GZ curve.

The criterion is passed if the value of GMt is greater then the required value. or exceeds. In addition to a fixed required value. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ is greater then the required value. GMt is computed from waterplane inertia and immersed volume (not the slope of the GZ curve as this is inaccurate if the heel angle resolution is insufficient). they will be ignored when selecting the lowest. angle of maximum GZ or the downflooding angle. If all the upper limit values are less than the lower limit. Option specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Value of Maximum GZ Description Value of GZ at either User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value Units deg deg deg deg length Finds the maximum value of GZ within a specified heel angle range. first peak in GZ curve. the greater of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Units deg . This functionality is to allow criteria such as “The maximum GZ at 30deg or greater”. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ is greater than the required value. the upper range heel angle specified in the criterion. If you want to check the value of GZ at a certain angle you can set both specified angles as the required angle.Appendix F Value of GMt at Finds the value of GMt at either a specified heel angle or the equilibrium angle. then the criterion will fail. Option in the range from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Page 244 Description Value of maximum GZ Lower limit for heel angle range. Note: Upper limit and analysis heel angle range It is required that the range of heel angles specified for the Large Angle Stability analysis is equal. you may also select a calculation to provide the required minimum GM. If any of the calculated angles for the upper limit are less than the lower limit. Option specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Select calculation from list Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Value of GZ at Description Value of GMt at either User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Chose a calculation for the minimum required GM from a copy of one of the Parent calculations Permissible value Units deg deg length length Finds the value of GZ at either a specified heel angle.

Appendix B to the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Upper limit for heel angle range. See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value deg deg deg deg length Value of Maximum GZ Value of GZ at Specified Angle or Maximum GZ below Specified Angle If the angle at which maximum GZ occurs is greater than a specified value. Option heel angle at which required GZ is constant Description If the angle of maximum GZ is greater than or equal to this value. see graph below. the required value of GZ is constant and is taken at this specified angle. Units deg Page 245 . the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle. Otherwise the value of maximum GZ is calculated. The required GZ value depends on the angle at which the maximum occurs. this should normally be specified and be less than or equal to the upper limit of the range of heel angles used for the Large Angle Stability analysis. Otherwise the required value of maximum GZ varies as a hyperbolic function with the angle of maximum GZ. the value of GZ at the specified angle is calculated. This is 0 .

Appendix F Option required value of GZ at this angle is limited by first GZ peak angle limited by first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than If If GZ max 0 Description Required value of GZ at the heel angle specified above. Angle at which GZ is measured may be limited to first downflooding angle.80665m/s2 g GZ is the righting lever. 0 GZ max GZ max 0 then GZ max must be greater than GZ 0 where: is the specified angle at which the required GZ value becomes a constant 0 GZ max is the heel angle at which the maximum GZ of value occurs 0 GZ is the GZ value at 0 and GZ max is the maximum value of GZ. Permissible value. The righting moment RM is given by: RM gGZ where: is the vessel volume of displacement is the density of the liquid the vessel is floating in is acceleration due to gravity = 9. Angle at which GZ is measured may be limited to the location of the first peak in the GZ curve. Page 246 . Value of RM at Specified Angle or Maximum RM Below Specified Angle As above (Value of GZ at specified angle or maximum GZ below specified angle) except the righting moment rather than the righting lever is specified. Variation of required GZ with angle of maximum GZ The angle at which the GZ was measured is listed in the results. constant value. Units length deg deg length then GZ 0 must be greater than the specified. This is GZ 0 . measured and compared.

the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than Description Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 First heel angle. first heel angle. the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Second heel angle. second heel angle. Ratio Option GZ GZ 1 2 Phi1. the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Phi2.Appendix B Ratio of GZ Values at Phi1 and Phi2 Calculates the ratio of the GZ values at two specified heel angles. the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value Units deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg % Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 Page 247 . The criterion is passed if the ratio is less then the required value.

g. Option spec. the user is advised that the vessel should be heeled in the opposite direction and the criterion is failed.: it is possible to check that the equilibrium angle does not exceed half (or any other fraction) the downflooding angle. GZ angle of vanishing stability Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than Description Ratio of equilibrium angle to the lesser of: Specified heel angle Angle of first immersion of the margin line Angle of first immersion of the deck edge Smallest immersion angle of the specified type of Key Point Angle of first local peak in GZ curve Angle at which maximum GZ occurs Angle of vanishing stability Permissible value Units deg deg deg deg deg deg deg % Page 248 . The user may choose the type of Key point to define the downflooding angle (downflooding point. Option Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than Description Angle of equilibrium Permissible value Units deg Ratio of equilibrium heel angle to the lesser of The equilibrium angle and the lesser of the selected angles are compared. Using a ratio gives more flexibility. If the equilibrium angle is negative. e. The criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value. potential downflooding point. The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value. heel angle angle of margin line immersion angle of deck edge immersion first flooding angle of the angle of first GZ peak angle of max. Option limited by first GZ peak angle limited by first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Angle of Equilibrium Description Angle of maximum GZ The angle of maximum GZ shall not be greater than the angle at which the first GZ peak occurs The angle of maximum GZ shall not be greater than the angle at which the first downflooding occurs Permissible value Units deg deg deg Finds the angle of equilibrium from the intersection of the GZ curve with the GZ=0 axis. heel angle can be limited by first peak in GZ curve and/or first downflooding angle. embarkation point. immersion point). If the ratio is less than the required value.Appendix F Angle of Maximum GZ Finds the angle at which the value of GZ is a maximum positive value. then the criterion is passed.

The criterion is passed if the smallest angle at which the deck edge immerses is greater then the required value. Angle of Downflooding Finds the angle of first downflooding. This type of criterion is used to formulate criteria such as: The maximum allowable angle of equilibrium is 15 degrees in the damage condition. The criterion is passed if the smallest angle at which the margin line immerses is greater then the required value. Option Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Angle of deck edge immersion Permissible value Units deg Angle of Vanishing Stability Finds the angle of vanishing stability from the intersection of the GZ curve with the GZ=0 axis. Option Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than Description Angle of vanishing stability Permissible value Units deg Range of Positive Stability The angular range for which the GZ curve is positive is computed. Option Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Angle of margin line immersion Permissible value Units deg Angle of Deck Edge Immersion Finds the first/minimum angle at which the deck edge immerses. The criterion is passed if the computed range is greater then the required value. Option from the greater of Description Range of positive stability Lower limit Units Page 249 . The criterion is passed if the downflooding angle is greater then the required value.Appendix B Equilibrium heel angle satisfies either This criterion is nothing more than two “Ratio of equilibrium heel angle to the lesser of” criteria. but this can be allowed to increase to 17 degrees if the deck edge is not immersed. The actual criterion is passed if either of the individual criteria is passed. The criterion is passed if the angle of vanishing stability is greater then the required value. Option Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Angle of downflooding Permissible value Units deg Angle of Margin Line Immersion Finds the first/minimum angle at which the margin line immerses.

Option from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec.Appendix F Option specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of the range See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value Units deg deg deg deg deg GZ Area between Limits type 1 .angle Page 250 . The criterion is passed if the area under the graph is greater than the required value. from lesser angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Units deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg See Nomenclature Permissible value deg length.standard Lower limit for integration. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge angle of vanishing stability Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description GZ area between limits type 1 . from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration.standard The area below the GZ curve and above the GZ=0 axis is integrated between the selected limits and compared with a minimum required value.

749(18) §4.HSC monohull type The area under the GZ curve is integrated between the specified limits. then the required area would be given by: A A 0.3. However the required minimum area depends on the upper integration limit.2.055 30 30 15 max max or simplifying: 0. The criterion is passed if the computed area under the graph is greater then the required value. required area = A1 .055m.07m.6. The required area is defined as follows: If If max max 2 : required area = A2 . and A2 is the For example.55 0.standard GZ area between limits type 2. the upper integration limit.rad and the upper angle was 30 and the required area at this angle was 0.55 0. The required area is defined below and is based on the area required for IMO MSC. 1: A2 If 1 Where: max is max 2 A1 2 A2 2 1 max : required area = . A1 is the area under the GZ curve required at the specified lower heel angle area under the GZ curve required at the specified higher heel angle 2.5. 1.Appendix B GZ area between limits type 1 .2 and IMO A.07 0.1.001 30 Page 251 . if the lower angle was 15 and the required area at this angle was 0.rad.3.36(63) §2.

angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability lower heel angle Description GZ area between limits type 2.angle deg length.Appendix F Variation of required area with upper integration limit Option from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec..angle length.angle Page 252 . from smallest angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Minimum angle that requires a GZ area greater than. Until this angle the required GZ area is constant Value of GZ area that is required until the lower heel angle Angle from which the required GZ area remains constant onwards Value of GZ area that is required from the higher heel angle onwards Permissible value Units deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg required GZ area at lower heel angle higher heel angle required GZ area at higher heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than length. from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration..HSC monohull type Lower limit for integration.

if the specified angle ( 1 ) was 30 and the required area at this angle ( A1 ) was 0. The criterion is passed if the computed area under the graph is greater than the required value.36 (63) Annex 7 §1. then the required area would be given by: A 0.HSC monohull type GZ area between limits type 3 .rad. the upper integration limit. The required area is defined below limit ( and is based on the area required for IMO MSC. 1.HSC multihull type The area under the GZ curve is integrated between the specified limits. However the required minimum area depends on the upper integrationA1 1 / max).055m.Appendix B GZ area between limits type 2 . A1 is the area under the GZ curve required at the specified heel angle For example. required area = A1 Where: max is 1 / max .055 30 / max Page 253 .1.

Appendix F Variation of required area with upper integration limit Option from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability higher heel angle required GZ area at higher heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description GZ area between limits type 3 .angle Page 254 .angle length. from lesser angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Heel angle at which required GZ area is specified Value of GZ area that is required until the higher heel angle Permissible value Units deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg length. from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration.HSC multihull type Lower limit for integration.

User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Area 1 upper integration limit.HSC multihull type Ratio of GZ area between limits This criterion calculates the ratio of the two areas between the GZ curve and the GZ=0 axis. User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature 3 Units 1 2 deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg Page 255 . where “abs” means the absolute value of. User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Area 2 lower integration limit.Appendix B GZ area between limits type 3 . Area 1 Ratio = = abs Area 2 1 4 abs 3 GZ d Option Area 1 from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Area 1 to the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Area 2 from the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Description Ratio of GZ area between limits Area 1 lower integration limit. 2 GZ d .

Appendix F Option Area 2 to specified heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Area 1 upper integration limit. see graph below. GZ areas below the GZ=0 axis on the negative heel angle side of the GZ curve are not considered positive. Page 256 . the lower and upper integration limits for Area 1 are equilibrium and vanishing stability. respectively and the limits for Area 2 are vanishing stability and 180 deg. The limits for Area 2 remain unchanged. In the example below. Area 1 would be from equilibrium to vanishing stability and Area 2 would be from vanishing stability to 180 deg. Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 1 In the following example the upper limit for Area 1 has been set to the downflooding angle. Typically. User specified heel angle Permissible value 4 Units deg % This criterion is designed to be calculated on the positive side of the GZ curve only.

Option Description Units Page 257 .Appendix B Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 2 In the final example. Note that Area 2 is now A1 – A2. the lower integration range for Area 2 has been reduced to the downflooding angle. Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 3 Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits This criterion calculates the ratio of GZ area above the GZ=0 axis to that below the axis in the given heel angle range.

where the value of GZ < 0. And the areas are defined as follows: If both heel angle limits are ≥ zero: Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis.Appendix F Option in the heel angle range from to Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits User specified lower limit heel angle User specified upper limit heel angle Permissible value Units deg deg % Ratio = Area 1 . If both heel angle limits are < zero: Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. Area 2 is negative. Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits. where the value of GZ > 0. Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. abs Area 2 where “abs” means the absolute value of. Area 1 is positive. where the value of GZ < 0. Area 1 is positive. upper limit = 180deg. Area 2 is negative. Positive heel: lower limit = 0deg. where the value of GZ > 0. Page 258 .

Positive and negative heel: lower limit = -180deg. Area 2 is negative. where the value of GZ < 0 for heel angles < 0. where the value of GZ > 0 for heel angles ≥ 0 plus the area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. upper limit = 180deg. Area 1 is positive. where the value of GZ < 0 for heel angles ≥ 0 plus the area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. upper limit = 0deg. Page 259 . Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits. Negative heel: lower limit = -180deg. Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. where the value of GZ > 0 for heel angles < 0.Appendix B Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits. If the lower heel angle limit < zero. and the upper heel angle limit > zero (the upper limit is assumed to be greater than the lower limit): Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis.

5 GZmax . except for the fact that you don‟t have to specify the heeling arm for each criterion separately. GZ limit Range limit deg deg deg deg deg deg deg length deg S = C sqrt( 0. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge angle of vanishing stability Max. The criteria themselves work much the same as the Heeling arm criteria (page 264). these can be cross-referenced into new heeling arm criteria: Page 260 .Appendix F Subdivision Index s-factor . See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing s Units specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Upper angle of range: lesser of deg deg specified heel angle spec. After you have defined your heeling arms. User specified heel angle See Nomenclature The lowest of the selected angles is be to specify the upper limit of the range of positive stability and the range in which the maximum value of GZ should be found. but can simply select which heeling arm you wish to apply. range) Both the values of maximum GZ and range of positive stability can be clipped.MSC 19(58) Probabilistic damage s-factor according to MSC 19(58) Option Lower angle of range : the greater of Description The greater of the selected angles is be to specify the lower limit of the range of positive stability and the range in which the maximum value of GZ should be found. Heeling arm criteria (xRef) The cross-reference heeling arm criteria are set up to allow you to define heeling arms or heeling moments in a central location and then cross-reference or link them into the criteria.

see Minimum GM calculator – Grain The required GM for vessels carrying grain.645 B Vd 0.25 B 0.23(59).Appendix B The heeling arms are cross-referenced simply by selecting the desired heeling arm from the pull-down list: For information on defining heeling arms or moments. is calculated as follows: GM L B Vd 0.0875 SF Where (using consistent units): L is the combined length of all full compartments B is the moulded breadth of the vessel SF is the stowage factor Vd is the calculated average void depth Δ is the vessel displacement Input parameters for: Grain heeling min. as defined in IMO Resolution MSC. required GM Page 261 .

170: service on protected water: k0 = 0. 170. 170. H is the height of the assumed centre of lateral resistance of the vessel. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Constant The required GM is calculated as follows: GM a cos n ( 0 ) sin m ( 0 ) Where (using consistent units): a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used) 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle Page 262 .170: service on partially protected water: k0 = 0.0033 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. Δ is the vessel displacement 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle A is the windage area which may be specified as a total area or as an area additional to the area of the hull above the waterline.0025 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. for example: For CFR 46.170: ocean service: k0 = 0.028 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t Input parameters for: Wind pressure min.036 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t For CFR 46.055 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t For CFR 46.Appendix F Minimum GM calculator – Wind pressure The GM required to withstand wind pressure is calculated as follows: k0 GM L k1 2 A(h H ) cos n ( 0 ) sin( 0 ) Where (using consistent units): L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value directly rather than having it calculated by Hydromax. h is height of the centroid of A above the zero point.005 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. 170. k0 and k1 are constants.

Input parameters for: Constant min. a heel adjustment may be included: 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle m. n are the exponents for sine and cosine.0 K Where N is the number of passengers.050: GM Nb with a K tan( 0 ) Nb and m. typically the height of the watertight trunk l is a length. n = 1. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Constant with freeboard The required GM is calculated as follows: GM a f B fa cos n ( 0 ) sin m ( 0 ) Where (using consistent units): a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used) B is the vessel beam f is the minimum freeboard for the upright (zero heel) condition to the deck-edge or marginline. Page 263 . b is their average transverse location and K is the number of passengers per unit mass.Appendix B m. typically the breadth of the watertight trunk b0 is a constant with the same units as b b1 is a dimensionless constant If desired. B is the same as that used in the expression for GM k is a dimensionless constant h is a height. Parent Heeling Arms on page 229. 171. typically the length of the watertight trunk b is a breadth. fa is the additional freeboard allowance calculated as follows (additionally the freeboard allowance may be limited to a maximum specified value): fa k h l L 2b b0 B b1 Where (using consistent units): L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value directly rather than having it calculated by Hydromax. An example of where this calculation should be used is in CFR 46. n are the exponents for sine and cosine.

Ratio of GMt and heel arm criterion Value of GZ at equilibrium .general heeling arm Calculates the value of the GZ curve at the equilibrium intersection of the GZ and heel arm curves. The heeling arm criteria available in the Hydromax Criteria dialog are listed below. . combined criteria. Page 264 . angle of margin line immersion. or first flooding angle of the specified key point type.general heeling arm Calculates the transverse metacentric height (GMT) at the intersection of the GZ and heel arm curves. The transverse GM is taken at a user-specified heel angle or angle of equilibrium (without heel arm). these are where several criteria are applied to the same heeling arm Value of GMT at equilibrium . The criterion is passed if the GZ value is greater then the required value. GMT is computed from the waterplane inertia and the displaced volume at the equilibrium heel angle. this angle may also be multiplied by a user-specified factor. GM sin( ) HA( ) Where the heel angle. The specified cross-referenced heel arm is then evaluated at this heel angle to give: HA( ) . they only exist in xRef form. The criterion is passed if the GMT value is greater then the required value. Finally.Appendix F Heeling arm criteria The preferred method is to use the xRef heeling arm criteria rather than the stand alone heeling arm criteria. Also available are: Multiple heeling arm criteria. is the lesser of: a user-specified heel angle. Ratio of GMT and heeling arm Calculates the following ratio and the criterion is passed if the ratio exceeds the specified value. This is because a wider range of heeling arm formulations is available and for some criteria. angle of deck edge immersion. In addition. these are where the same criterion is applied to up to three heeling arms and/or combinations of these heeling arms Heeling Arm.

general heeling arm Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm Finds the maximum value of (GZ .heel arm) is greater then the required value. Page 265 .heel arm) at or above a specified heel angle.Appendix B Value of GZ at equilibrium . The criterion is passed if the value of (GZ . The first downflooding angle may be selected as an upper limit.

The value of GZ at this heel angle must be greater than zero. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”. The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. the maximum ratio of GZ:heel arm occurs at 21. including “specified heel angle”. Examples: Upper limit is 50% of angle of margin line immersion (43 / 2 = 21.5 .5 ). If the heeling arm is zero or negative in the range. In the range 0 to 21. then the point with maximum positive GZ (where the heeling arm 0. including “specified heel angle”. Maximum ratio of GZ to heeling arm This criterion calculates the maximum ratio of GZ : Heeling arm (for the same heel angle) within the range of heel angles specified. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”.553m and the heel arm 0. At this heel angle the value of GZ is 0. This is applied to all selected upper angle limits. Page 266 .5 .Appendix F Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected upper angle limits.0) will be selected.930m giving a ratio of 59%.

) Page 267 .122m and the heel arm 0. the exact value will depend slightly on the heel angles tested in the Large Angle Stability analysis. at this heel angle the heel arm is zero (thus the ratio infinite). Hence the criterion is passed.5m giving a ratio of 224%. At this heel angle the value of GZ is 1. the downflooding angle is 94.4 ). thus the maximum ratio occurs at the angle of maximum GZ (62. The angle and value of GZ is given for the location where it is a maximum (in the region where the heel arm is zero.3 .Appendix B In this case a constant heeling arm is used. Finally.

This criterion can be used to check that the GZ is at least as great as the heeling arm over the specified range.general heeling arm Used to check the ratio of GZ values at two points on the GZ curve. The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value.heel arm) is maximum. Minimum ratio of GZ to heeling arm This criterion calculates the minimum ratio of GZ : Heeling arm (for the same heel angle) within the range of heel angles specified. the same criterion may be used to check that the GZ is positive over the specified range. If a heeling arm with zero amplitude is used. positive).Appendix F The same is true if an unusual user-defined heeling arm is used.Heel Arm is maximum. Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 . The heel arm is used to define the equilibrium angle and the heel angle where (GZ . The criterion is passed if the ratio is less than the required value. including “specified heel angle”. And checks that this ratio is greater than a specified value. GZ Ratio = GZ 1 2 Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm Calculates the heel angle at which the difference between the GZ curve and the heeling arm is greatest (GZ . Page 268 . In this case the heeling arm is zero between 50 and 70 . Hence the maximum ratio reported is infinity and occurs at the angle where GZ is maximum in this heel angle range. The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected upper angle limits. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”.

Angle of equilibrium .Appendix B Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm .general heeling arm Angle of equilibrium .general heeling arm Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the specified heeling arm.general heeling arm Page 269 . The criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value. The equilibrium angle is the smallest positive angle where the GZ and heeling arm curves intersect and the GZ curve has positive slope.

[Range of stability] = [Angle of vanishing stability] – [Angle of equilibrium] The criterion is passed if the value of range of stability is greater then the required value.general heeling arm Computes the range of positive stability with the heeling arm. This criterion should not be confused with the range of positive stability. Angle of vanishing stability .general heeling arm Calculates the location of the first intersection of the GZ curve and heel arm curve where the slope of the GZ curve is negative. The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value. The angle of equilibrium is computed as described in §Angle of equilibrium general heeling arm. Ratio = equilibriu m specified The other angle used to compute the ratio may be one of the following: Required angle for ratio calculation Auto complete text Marginline immersion angle MarginlineImmersionAngle Deck edge immersion angle DeckEdgeImmersionAngle Angle of first GZ peak DownfloodingAngle Angle of maximum GZ MaximumGZAngle First downflooding angle FirstGZPeakAngle Angle of vanishing stability with heel arm VanishingStabilityWithHeelArmAngle Angle of vanishing stability . Page 270 .Appendix F Angle of equilibrium ratio . selectable angle.general heeling arm Calculates the ratio of the angle of equilibrium (with the specified heeling arm) to another.general heeling arm Range of positive stability .

general heeling arm GZ area between limits type 1 .general heeling arm Page 271 .general heeling arm Computes the area below the GZ curve and above the heel arm curve between the specified heel angles. The criterion is passed if the area is greater than the required value.Appendix B Range of positive stability . 2 Area = GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d 1 GZ area between limits type 1 .

Type 1 stands for which areas are being integrated to calculate the ratio (see graph). The required value is based on a constant plus a proportion of the area under the GZ curve (Area 2). Area 1 constant kArea 2 GZ area between limits type 2 . 4 3 GZ ( )d . 2 Area 1 = Area 2 = GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d 1 . Page 272 . The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value.general heeling arm The area between the GZ curve and heel arm and the area under the GZ curve is computed (Area 1). This criterion is based on the area ratio required by various Navies‟ turning and passenger crowding criteria.Appendix F GZ area between limits type 2 .general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 1 . 4 3 GZ ( )d .general heeling arm The ratio of the area between the GZ curve and heel arm and the area under the GZ curve is computed. 2 Area 1 = Area 2 = GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d 1 . The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value.

general heeling arm This criterion is used to simulate the effects of wind heeling whilst the vessel is rolling in waves.0 is used. Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle.e. Because of the many different ways in which this criterion is used it has several options for defining the way in which the areas are calculated. Hence the rollback angle is taken from the equilibrium angle with the steady wind heeling arm. For more information see: §Heel.Appendix B Area 1 Ratio = Area 2 Ratio of areas type 1 .: where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope). the vessel is assumed to roll to windward (under the action of waves with the steady wind pressure acting on it. 2 Area 1 = Area 2 = GZ ( ) gust heel arm( ) d gust heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d Page 273 1 2 1 .general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 2 . The roll back may be specified as either a fixed angular roll back from the angle of equilibrium with the steady wind heel arm or can be rolled back to the vessel equilibrium angle ignoring the wind heeling arms (i. If a gust ratio of greater than 1. but the integration for Area 1 is taken from the equilibrium with the gust wind heeling arm. then roll to leeward under a gust.

Area GZ = Area HA = Ratio = 2 1 GZ ( )d .general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 3 . Area GZ Area HA Page 274 . Areas under the GZ=0 axis are counted as negative. The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value.Appendix F Area 1 Ratio = Area 2 Ratio of areas type 2 .general heeling arm The ratio of the area under the GZ curve to the area under the heel arm curve is computed. 2 1 heel arm( )d . This criterion is based on the area ratio required by BS6349-6:1989.

turning. The combined heeling arms are computed by adding the values of the individual heeling arms at each heel angle. wind.general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms. Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 .general heeling arm Multiple heeling arm criteria These criteria are used to check the effects of combinations of up to three heeling arms and their combinations.multiple heeling arms Checks the ratio of GZ values as per §Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 .Appendix B Ratio of areas type 3 . Page 275 . for example passenger crowding.

Page 276 .Appendix F Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 .multiple heeling arms Angle of equilibrium .multiple heeling arms Checks the equilibrium heel angle as per §Angle of equilibrium .general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.multiple heeling arms Checks the area under the heel angle as per §GZ area between limits type 1 .general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.multiple heeling arms GZ area between limits type 1 . Angle of equilibrium .

4 3 GZ ( )d .multiple heeling arms GZ area between limits type 2 . Area 1 constant kArea 2 Page 277 .multiple heeling arms Checks the area under the heel angle as per §GZ area between limits type 2 .Appendix B GZ area between limits type 1 . 2 Area 1 = Area 2 = GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d 1 .general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.

Page 278 .general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 1 .Appendix F GZ area between limits type 2 .multiple heeling arms Checks the area under the heel angle as per §Ratio of areas type 1 .

Several extra options are presented to the user.Appendix B Ratio of areas type 1 .multiple heeling arms Subdivision Index s-factor .MSC_216(82) The Subdivision Index s-factor as described in IMO MSC.216(82) is computed. Page 279 .

This is used to determine default parameters and which s-factors should be computed. User Upper angle of range: lesser of first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge s-Final Max.216(82) The type of vessel being analysed. heel K-factor max. If the equilibrium heel angle exceeds this value then sIntermediate is zero. GZ limit Range limit deg deg deg Parameters for computing the s-Final factor Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s-Final Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing sFinal Theta_min used to determine K Theta_max used to determine K Parameters for computing the sIntermediate factor Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s-Intermediate Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing sIntermediate Maximum allowable equilibrium heel angle after damage. heel s-Intermediate Max. Parameters for computing the sMoment factor Displacement of the intact vessel at the subdivision draft Reduction to be applied to maximum GZ Link to passenger heeling moment mass length mass. Cargo.length length deg length deg K-factor min.Appendix F Option Description Subdivision Index s-factor – MSC. allowable equilibrium heel angle deg s-Moment intact displacement at subdivision draft GZ reduction Passenger heel Page 280 . The beginning of the range of positive stability is taken as the first positive equilibrium angles See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Units Vessel type : Passenger. The lowest of the selected angles can be used to specify the upper limit of the range of positive stability. GZ limit Range limit deg deg Max.

{GZmax / limitGZmax . These are: 1. the minimum and maximum heel angles are set to 25 and 30 deg. The area ratio is evaluated as per § Ratio of areas type 1 . respectively. The criterion result is then the minimum value of s-Intermediate and (s-Final * s-Moment). s-Final = K. Although it is possible to evaluate these criteria by evaluation of their individual components. Range / limitRange}1/4 where: K = 1 if equilibrium heel <= Theta_min K = 0 if equilibrium heel >= Theta_max K = {(Theta_max – equilibrium heel) / (Theta_max – Theta_min)}1/2 s-Intermediate = {GZmax / limitGZmax . For the s-Final factor. Angle of steady heel must be less than a specified value.length mass. the minimum and maximum heel angles are set to 7 and 15 deg. Range / limitRange}1/4 if equilibrium heel > Max. If User is selected.general heeling arm.length Vessel type: If Passenger is selected. 2.Appendix B moment Wind heel moment Select survival craft heel moment Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Link to wind heeling moment Link to heeling moment that defines the effect of launching survival craft Permissible minimum value for sfactor mass. The result is the minimum of s-Intermediate and (s-Final * s-Moment). The Angle of steady heel is obtained as per §Angle of equilibrium . then all three s-factors are computed as for the Passenger ship. then s-Intermediate and s-Moment factors are computed. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . The area ratio must be greater than a specified value.general heeling arm This is a combined criterion where three individual criteria must be met. combined criteria Several criteria require the evaluation of several individual criteria components. for simplicity the common combinations have been combined into single criteria. and any values for the s-Final factor minimum and maximum heel angles may be specified. allowable equilibrium heel angle then s-Intermediate = 0 s-Moment = (GZmax – GZ reduction) .general heeling arm 3. The ratio of the value of GZ at equilibrium to the value of maximum GZ must be less than a specified value. then only the s-Final factor is computed and in this case. Page 281 . respectively. Displacement / Mheel where: Mheel is the maximum of the three selected heeling moments. If Cargo is selected. Note: At least one of the individual criteria has to be selected. All s-factors are in the range 0 <= s <= 1 Heeling arm.

The area ratio must be greater than a specified value. Angle of steady heel must be less than a specified value.Appendix F Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . The ratio of the value of GZ at equilibrium to the value of maximum GZ must be less than a specified value. Optionally. a gust wind can be applied. Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. 2. 3.general wind heeling arm This is a widely applicable wind heeling criterion in its most generic format. 1.general heeling arm. For more information see: §Heel.general heeling arm Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) . Page 282 .general heeling arm. The angle of steady heel is obtained as per Angle of equilibrium . The heeling arm is specified simply by a magnitude and cosine power. The area ratio is evaluated as per Ratio of areas type 2 .

If this is done. all calculations are done using a reduced GZ‟ curve which is computed at each heel angle as follows: GZ ' ( ) GZ ( ) B cos m ( ) This criterion may be used to evaluate the following specific criteria (as well as many others of similar format): Page 283 . a reduction of the GZ curve may be applied.Appendix B Area definition If required.

2 Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2a) . Area2 / Area1 must be greater than the required value phi2 . Royal Navy NES 109: §1.general heeling arm This criterion is based on the calculations required for the Bureau Veritas criterion that ensures safety when cargo is accidentally lost while lifting. §1. §4.9.Appendix F US Navy DDS079-1: §079-1-c(9) 1.2.3. §4.phi3 must be greater than the required value Page 284 .3.2 Initial impulse and Wind heeling criteria RAN A015866: §4. The criterion evaluates two checks: ratio of Area2 / Area1 and the remaining range of stability (phi3 – phi2).4. PhiC is fixed at the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm (first up-crossing intersection of GZ curve with heeling arm).2.5.3. §079-1-c(9) 4.4.4.8.5 IMO A.2 IMO MSC.749(18) Code on intact stability: §3.36(63) High-speed craft code §2.2. §1.3.1 ISO/FDIS 12217-1:2002(E) Small Non-Sailing Boats §6.

phi3 may be determined from a number of features of the GZ curve including being chosen such that Area3/Area1 is some specified value.3) must be specified. The criterion is then evaluated by comparing some requirement of the derived heeling arm with a specified value. the magnitude of the heeling arm is derived (rather than specified directly) from a required relationship between the GZ curve and the heeling arm curve. For more information see: §Heel. The required ratio of Area3/Area2 used to determine the angle phi3 deg deg deg deg angle at which Area3 / Area1 is deg Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. The lesser of the following three options A specified.g. Derived heeling arm criteria For these criteria. GZ derived heeling arm This criterion is used to calculate the amplitude of a heeling arm derived from the value of GZ at a certain heel angle. heel angle (equilibrium angle during lifting) roll back from angle of equilibrium with heeling arm angle of equilibrium (without heel arm) Area2 integrated to the lesser of (phi2) Max. The shape of the heeling arm (e. This angle is used to evaluate the second part of the criterion: the difference phi2-phi3 must be greater than the required value. fixed heel angle Units Area1 integrated from the greater of (phi1) spec. The GZ value used to define the heeling arm is the GZ at one of the following heel angles: Page 285 . cos1. GZ area or angle of equilibrium requirement. The heeling arm is normally derived from a GZ value.Appendix B Option Description Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2a) Angle that defines the lower heel angle for the integration range of Area1. heeling angle due to roll taken as the lesser of (phi3) deg A roll-back angle (positive) from the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm (first up-crossing intersection of the GZ and heeling arm curves) Roll back to the angle of equilibrium of the vessel (ignoring the heeling arm) Upper integration limit of Area2 chosen from the lesser of the seven options.

and is then compared with a minimum required value. see below. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of max. The amplitude of the heeling. 1: specified angle of heel angle of equilibrium Upper integration limit. heel angle 2: spec. A where: GZ cos n Amplitude of heeling arm Shape of heeling arm (n = 0 for constant heeling arm) Specified heel angle Value of GZ at specified heel angle Required ratio = GZ / HA A n GZ GZ area derived heeling arm type 1 This criterion is used to calculate the amplitude of a heeling arm derived from the area under the GZ curve between specified limits. The area under both the GZ and heeling arm curves is integrated between the same specified limits. 2 2 1 GZ d A cos n d 1 A n GZ Amplitude of heeling arm Shape of heeling arm (n = 0 for constant heeling arm) heel angle GZ curve Required ratio Page 286 . GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability It is also possible to specify a minimum heel angle for the upper integration limit. spec. Lower integration limit. which satisfies the equation below arm is then found and compared with a minimum required value. Any negative areas (due to negative GZ) up to this minimum upper integration heel angle will be deducted from the total area under the GZ curve.Appendix F specified angle of heel angle of first peak in GZ curve angle at which maximum GZ occurs angle of first downflooding immersion angle of margin line or deck edge The heeling arm is then calculated as described by the equation below.

Page 287 .GZ derived wind heeling arm The derived wind heeling criterion is used to check that the steady heel angle due to wind pressure exceeds a certain value. The wind gust will cause the vessel to heel over to the lesser of a specified heel angle. The rollback angle is taken from the equilibrium angle with the wind heeling arm. the vessel is assumed to roll to windward under the action of waves and then roll to leeward. Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. A heeling arm of prescribed shape is found such that the specified area ratio is met.: where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope). Because of the many different ways in which this criterion is used it has several options for defining the way in which the areas are calculated.general heeling arm Angle of equilibrium . For more information see: §Heel. The roll back may be specified as either: a fixed angular roll back from the angle of equilibrium with the wind heel arm. Area 1 = 2 1 GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d Area 2 = 2 1 heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d Area 1 Ratio = Area 2 GZ area derived heeling arm (type 2) .Appendix B GZ area derived heeling arm type 2 This criterion is used to simulate the effects of wind heeling whilst the vessel is rolling in waves.e. roll back to the vessel equilibrium angle ignoring the wind heeling arms (i. The amplitude of the heeling arm is then compared with a required minimum value. angle of maximum GZ or the first downflooding angle. The steady heel arm is derived from a gust of specified ratio. angle of the first GZ peak. With the wind pressure acting on it. or roll back to a specified heel angle.

The derived heeling arm is chosen such that the areas. φ2. Page 288 . A1 and A2. if the angle of steady heel is greater than the angle. The specified heeling arm is specified by an amplitude and cosine power. the same cosine power is used for both the specified and the derived heeling arms. There are several options which can be used to define the upper and lower ranges for the area integrations. is the angle of equilibrium with a derived heeling arm. The first equilibrium angle. This means that the lesser of: a specified heel angle.Appendix F The vessel is assumed to be safe from gusts up to the specified ratio.derived wind heeling arm Ratio of equilibrium angles . Angle of equilibrium . should be large enough to withstand a gust from a steady wind heeling angle larger than …. are in the specified ratio. is the angle of equilibrium with a specified heeling arm. angle of maximum GZ or the first downflooding angle. first peak in GZ curve.GZ area derived heeling arm This criterion is used to compare the equilibrium angles with two different heeling arms. φ1. The second equilibrium angle.

Appendix B Ratio of equilibrium angles . then the ratio φ2 : φ1 must be less than unity. Thus if it is required that φ2 be less than φ1.derived heeling arm Area 1 = 2 1 GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d Area 2 = 2 1 Area 1 Ratio of areas = Area 2 φ1 = Angle of equilibrium with heeling arm derived from required area ratio (purple heeling arm) φ2 = Angle of equilibrium with specified heeling arm (orange heeling arm) The criterion is passed if the ratio φ2 : φ1 is less than the required value. Option A n required area ratio Area1 / Area2 options options options Description Magnitude of specified heeling arm Cosine power to describe shape of both specified and derived heelning arms The required area ratio used to find the derived heeling arm magnitude Specify lower integration limit for Area1 Specify upper integration limit for Area1 Specify lower integration limit for Area2. the upper integration limit is always the angle of Units length deg deg deg Page 289 .

Option delta Description Adjustment to STIX rating.Appendix F required value equilibrium with derived heel arm Specifies the maximum allowable ratio of equilibrium heel angle with the specified heel arm to the equilibrium heel angle with the derived heel arm (phi2 / phi1). either 0 or 5. . sail area ISO 8666 length2 height of centroid of AS length LH. Hull length as defined by ISO 8666. Other criteria . Hydromax calculates this parameter as the overall length of the vessel (all hull surfaces) in the upright. has reserve buoyancy and positive righting lever at a heel angle of 90º 0 in all other cases. positive up). Units AS. Please refer to ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2002(E) for exact definitions of parameters and how they should be calculated. which do not easily fall into the categories above. zero trim condition. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. zero trim condition. Height of sail area centre of effort from model‟s vertical datum (not necessarily the waterline. Other combined criteria Other criteria. For more information see: §Heel.STIX The stability index criterion or STIX criterion as described in ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2002(E) is used to assess the stability of sailing craft. Note that no additional windage areas are calculated by Hydromax for this criterion. This value is normally less than or equal to 100%. length length BH. are found here. this is not the same as the STIX variable hCE which is measured from the waterline. Hull beam as defined by ISO 8666. 5 if the vessel. beam of hull length Page 290 . Sail area as defined in ISO 8666. indicating that the equilibrium heel angle with the specified heel arm must be less than the equilibrium heel angle with the derived heel arm Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. The required input parameters are described below. when fully flooded with water. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the overall beam of the vessel (all hull surfaces) in the upright.

the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used. This affects the calculation of the Wind Moment and Downflooding factors. this is not the same as the STIX variable hLP ). The heeling arm is calculated from the number. Height of centre of the lateral projected immersed area of the hull from model‟s vertical datum (not necessarily the waterline. beam waterline height of immersed profile area centroid Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Hull waterline length in the current load condition as defined by ISO 8666. if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim.Appendix B Option LWL. Hull waterline beam in the current load condition as defined by ISO 8666. Page 291 . if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. Specific stand alone heeling arm criteria These criteria provide some specific stand alone heeling arm criteria. Hence. the angle of downflooding is taken to be the largest heel angle tested. if no downflooding points are defined. see §Passenger crowding. Hydromax uses the numerical STIX rating value rather than the STIX design category.passenger crowding heeling arm Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm due to passenger crowding applied. Stand alone heeling arm criteria Angle of equilibrium . Hydromax calculates this parameter as the waterline length of the vessel (all hull surfaces) at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity. the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used. but it is highly recommended to use the equivalent xRef criteria with the desired heeling arms. Hydromax calculates this parameter at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity. length waterline BWL. Units length length length Hydromax calculates the various factors and STIX rating according to ISO/FDIS 122172:2002(E). may be specified or calculated by Hydromax. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the waterline beam of the vessel (all hull surfaces) at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity. They are included for compatibility with criteria sets defined in earlier versions of Hydromax. if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim. Note that a downflooding angle is required to calculate the STIX index. the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used. or defined downflooding points do not immerse within the selected heel angle range. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. weight and location of the passengers.

general cos+sin heeling arm The lifting criterion is the same as the Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . Page 292 . see §Turning. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . the only difference being the shape of the heel arm.general heeling arm. for further information also see §General cos+sin heeling arm H( ) Area 1 = Area 2 = k A cos n ( ) 2 1 B sin m ( ) . In this criterion the heel arm has both a sine and a cosine component. however the heel arm is the specific passenger crowding form.general heeling arm except that the heel arm has both a cos and sin component.general heeling arm. GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d 4 3 GZ ( )d . Area 1 Ratio = Area 2 Stand alone heeling arm combined criteria Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . The heeling arm is calculated from the turn radius.high-speed turn heeling arm Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm due to high speed turning applied. Ratio of areas type 1 .high-speed turn This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . however the heel arm is the specific high-speed turning form. This is used to simulate the effects of lifting weights and is used by several Navies.general cos+sin heeling arm This is a very similar criterion to § Ratio of areas type 1 . vessel speed and height of the vessel‟s centre of gravity.Appendix F Angle of equilibrium .passenger crowding This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . The modified form of the heeling arm is given below.general heeling arm.

Area definition Page 293 . projected area and area lever information.lifting weight This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .general wind heeling arm except that the magnitude of the heeling arm is automatically calculated from the wind pressure (or velocity). however the heel arm is the specific lifting of a heavy weight form.towing This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) .general cos+sin heeling arm.Appendix B Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) – cos+sin heeling arm Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . however the heel arm is the specific towing form.wind heeling arm This criterion is exactly the same as §Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) .general cos+sin heeling arm.

Appendix F Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. Page 294 . For more information see: §Heel.

what is essentially the same criterion. This is the integral of the GZ curve where the ordinate is the area under the GZ curve integrated from zero to the heel angle in question. In this section we look at some common criteria and demonstrate how they may be evaluated in Hydromax. Capsizing moment Often a capsizing moment is determined from the dynamic stability curve by drawing a line through the origin which is tangent to the GZ area curve.Appendix B Appendix D: Specific Criteria In Hydromax. The problem is to reformulate this so that this capsizing moment can be found from the GZ curve: Dynamic stability curve and Dynamic heeling arm. the values are the same indicating that the areas under each curve from 0 to 2 are the same. constants such as acceleration due to gravity are explicitly shown in the formulations and consistent units are used – thus removing the need for obscure constants with strange units. From the figure above we can see that the slopes of both curves are the same at 1 and 2 . Finally since the dynamic heeling arm is a straight line with constant slope we know that the corresponding heeling arm is a constant value. From these facts we can derive the following GZ and heeling arm curves: Page 295 . Furthermore. In some cases. at 2 . This is the dynamic heeling arm curve (blue) and is the integral of a constant value heeling arm. In Hydromax we have always sought to keep the physical significance transparent in the formulation – for this reason. is presented in quite different ways by different regulatory bodies. from this we can deduce that the value of GZ and Heeling arm are the same at these angles. Dynamic stability criteria In some cases the criteria are expressed in terms of the so-called dynamic stability curve. we have tried to distil the essence of the various stability criteria and present them in their simplest form whilst preserving the physical significance of the stability characteristic under assessment. The capsizing moment is taken as the magnitude of GZ at this tangent heel angle 2 . Remembering this relationship and that the slope of the dynamic stability curve is the value of GZ it is often possible to reformulate the same criterion in terms of one based on the GZ curve.

Area 2 corresponds to the area under the GZ curve up to the second intercept Knowing that Area1 = Area2 we can deduce that Area 3 = Area 4 in the figure below: Page 296 . Area 1 corresponds to the area under the heeling arm curve up to the second intercept Stability curve.Appendix F Stability curve.

..749(18) amended to MSC. IMO Code on Intact Stability A. 1929). it is necessary to divide by vessel mass.) In the following section.Note on unit conversion There are quite a few different ways in which different authorities define their heeling arms. Monaco.1. All Hydromax criteria use a heeling arm since this is what is ultimately plotted on the GZ curve. Be careful as some criteria specify heeling arms and some specify heeling moments or “moments” in mass.Heeling due to turning Heeling moment defined by: MR Where: 0..2. the conversions for some common criteria have been explained.length. Hydromax uses an internal conversion of knots to m/s based on the International Nautical mile which is defined as exactly 1852m (International Hydrographic Conference.75(69) 3. To obtain the heeling arm from the heeling moment.Appendix B The magnitude of the heeling arm must be chosen so that Area 3 = Area 4 So the capsizing moment can also be determined by finding the heeling moment that gives Area3 = Area4.. (Note that the UK nautical mile is 6080ft = 1853. and in the case of “moments” in mass.184m.6 . The approach that has been taken in Hydromax is to reflect the physics of what is generating the heeling moment.length. it is necessary to divide by vessel weight ( g ). This can easily be done in Hydromax using the GZ area derived heeling arm type 2 criterion. giving a conversion multiplier for knots to m/s of 0.51477333.2 V02 L tonne KG d [kNm] 2 MR V0 L tonne = heeling moment in kNm = service speed in m/s = length of ship at waterline in m = displacement in tonne Page 297 .5144444. Thus 1 knot = 1852/3600 = 0. Heeling arms for specific criteria . m/s.

2 V02 KG Lg d [m] 2 HR g 0. H R 1000 M R / g [m].2 KG Lg d 2 Equating similar terms: h V R L and KG V0 d 2 and assuming that the ratio of the turn radius to the vessel length is 5. Where: V R h a = vessel speed in m/s = radius of turn in m = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity) Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm. we obtain: a V2 Rg h V02 0. 3.Severe wind and rolling criterion (weather criterion) Heeling arm defined by: L R 1.02 Note that it suffices that a a that satisfies this relationship may be chosen.2 510% 1. the choice of a ratio of 5.81 l w1 P tonne [m] Where: = heeling arm in m = wind pressure in Pa Page 298 . is given by: d 1000 2 g 0. we obtain: 510% a 0.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as: HR a V2 Rg h [m].1:1.2 V02 KG L 1000 Where: = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.02 and any ratio of turn radius to vessel length and constant lw1 PAZ 1000 g9.Appendix F d KG = mean draft m = height of centre of gravity above keel in m Hence the heeling arm.2 .1:1 merely gives a constant approaching the theoretically correct value of unity.

H v HR g 0.81 9.9.Appendix B A Z tonne = projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroids of A and underwater lateral area in m = displacement in tonne = IMO assumed value of gravitational acceleration .80665 9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity) Where: g h H a Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm.81 tonne Equating similar terms: h H and Z a g g9.001PAZ [kNm] = heeling moment in kNm = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroids of A and underwater lateral area in m Where: Mv P A Z Hence the heeling arm.001PAZ 1000 g 1000M v / g [m].80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as: Page 299 .1.4 .Heeling moment due to wind pressure Heeling moment defined by: Mv 0.36(63) Annex 6 1.81 0.81 The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as: Hw a PA(h H ) g [m] = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9. we obtain: a PA(h H ) g PAZ 1000 g9.81m/s2 g9. is given by: PAZ g [m] Where: = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.99966 IMO HSC Code MSC.

Heeling due to wind Heeling arm defined by: HL1 Where: PAZ 9800 tonne [m] = heeling arm in m = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroid of A and half the lightest service draft in = displacement in tonne HL1 P A Z m tonne The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as: Hw a PA(h H ) g [m] = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9. we obtain: a PA(h H ) g PAZ g Equating similar terms: h H Z and a 1.Appendix F Hw g h H a a PA(h H ) g [m] = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9. we obtain: Equating similar terms: h H Z Page 300 .80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of half the lightest service draft in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity) Where: g h H a Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity) Where: Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm.3 . 0 Annex 7 1.

1. in the case of wind plus gust.1.Wind heeling moment USL wind heeling “moment” is specified as: M h H P A 0.80665 9.000102 PA(h H ) [tonne.50102 USL code (Australia) USL C.m] L Where: v kts tonne = vessel speed in knots = displacement in tonne Page 301 .3 .4 .80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity) Where: g a Thus equating: H a PA(h H ) g 0.m] = height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2 Where: Thus the heeling arm is given by: H 0.5.0 g 0. the factor a should be multiplied by the gust factor – typically 1.000102 PA(h H) 1000 [m] The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as: H a PA(h H ) g [m] = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.Appendix B and a g 9800 tonne 9.0002783 USL C.000102 1000. Hence.000102 PA(h H ) 1000 simplifying and rearranging: a 0.Heeling moment due to turning USL wind heeling “moment” is specified as: M 0.80665 1.8 1.102 9.1.0053 2 vkts tonnes h [tonne.1.00068 Where the effect of wind plus gust is required. a becomes 1.

is assumed to be constant at all angles of heel and shall be calculated as follows: Page 302 .80665 [ms-2]: a 0.0 [m] Where: = displacement in kg The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as: H a V2 Rg h [m].196424 This section explains how the ISO 12217-1 code calculates the heeling arm and how you can replicate this calculation with a Hydromax criterion. L a 0. MW.2 Rolling in beam waves and wind The curve of righting moments of the boat shall be established up to the downflooding angle or the angle of vanishing stability or 50°.0 finally. The heeling moment due to wind.3.Appendix F h L = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = waterline length of vessel in m Thus the heeling arm is given by: H 0. using annex D.999798 a Note that it suffices that .196424 509% 0. whichever is the least. = vessel speed in m/s = radius of turn in m = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity) Where: V R h a Thus equating the required USL heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm.0053 2 vkts tonnes h1 L 1000. ISO 12217-1:2002(E) R L 0. “6. we obtain: a V2 Rg h 0. the choice of a ratio of 509% merely gives a constant approaching the theoretically correct value of unity. with g = 9.5144 1000.196424 R L 509% gives a value for a: R Assuming that the ratio of the turn radius to the vessel length.0053 2 vkts tonnes h1 L 1000.3g 2 R vkts L V2 tonnes 5.0 simplifying and rearranging: a 5. and any ratio of turn radius to vessel length and constant a that satisfies this relationship may be chosen. expressed in newton metres.3g R 1 1 2 L 0.

You can calculate (ALV / LWL + TM) manually and then make sure the (h-H) value in Hydromax is the same by specifying: Velocity based heeling arm.” Basically they are using moment = force * lever.312 m. positive up. expressed in metres. and 21 m/s for design category B.55*LH * BH.1 + 1. but shall not be taken as less than 0. TM is the draft at the mid-point of the waterline length.0868 m The input for Hydromax requires: Total area A = 72 m2.1 m TM 1.7 tonne = 1037 kN LH 24 m BH 5 m LWL 21. and the lever is (ALV / LWL + TM) This lever is a bit confusing so let‟s concentrate on that.3 * 72 * (72 / 21.3. where the force is calculated as 0. h = (ALV / LWL + TM). the heeling moment is given as: MW = 0. a = 0. area centroid height: h = ALV / LWL + TM = 72 / 21. a = 0.applies to the additional windage area or the total windage area depending on which option you have selected. Make sure you check your total windage lever in the intermediate results in the criteria results tab of the Results window.Appendix B MW = 0. supposing we have a vessel with the following characteristics: Displacement 105. vW = 28 m/s for design category A. For example. ALV is the windage area as defined in 3.0.7.9 m vW 28 m/s for design category A ALV 72 m2 ( this is greater than 0.3 * ALV * vW2.1 + 1.55 LH BH = 66 m2) Thus according to the ISO 12217 formula.3 kg/m3 giving the expected result for heeling arm amplitude: Page 303 . Hydromax‟ wind heeling arm calculation uses H for the vertical height of the hydrodynamic centre (underwater area) and h as the vertical height of the aerodynamic centre (windage area) – all measured consistently from the zero point. H = 0.3 kg/m3 Note: the centre of the windage area -h.9) * 282 = 89961 Nm Thus the heeling arm = MW / Displacement = 89961 / 1037000 = 0. Thus the lever is (h-H) in Hydromax should be the same as the (ALV / LWL + TM) lever from ISO.9 = 5.3 ALV * (ALV / LWL + TM)* vW2 Where LWL is the waterline length.

6. Part 1: Non-sailing boats of hull length greater than or equal to 6m In many cases the user must determine the required pass value for the criteria.3: Resistance to wind and waves Determine the windage area and lever and enter them in the appropriate fields in the criterion. so this must be specified manually (it is measured from the model zero point.3.4: Heel due to wind action Page 304 .42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length. Also determine the required wind speed and roll-back angle (depending on the design category) and enter these values.3: Resistance to waves This criterion comprises two parts. 6.1.2) and entered into the required value field.1. H. positive upwards). The default value is set to 49. one to check that the righting moment is sufficient and a second to determine whether the righting lever is sufficient. See also the note on converting units for the definition of the heeling arms in ISO 122171:2002(E). 6. ISO 12217: Small craft – stability and buoyancy assessment and categorisation.1. which depends on the category and length of vessel being tested. 6. An additional requirement in this section is that a specified freeboard must be exceeded. see Tables 3 and 4 (Sections 6.2). Specify a loadcase with the offset load specified and carry out an equilibrium analysis. In Hydromax. 2.Appendix F Intermediate results for the wind heeling arm. of the centre of lateral resistance at the bottom of the vessel.2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figures 2 and 3 (Section 6.3: Downflooding angle Must be greater than a certain value as determined according to the design category. 6. Define a heeling arm and calculate the intersection of the heeling arm with the GZ curve to determine the angle of equilibrium.7 6.1. there is no option for placing the height. This section gives some details on implementing the ISO 12217 stability criteria in Hydromax. the default value is set at 1. 6.3. Verify that the angle of equilibrium does not exceed the maximum permissible value.2: Offset-load test There are several ways of evaluating this criterion: 1. In most cases the default required value would exceed the worst case.

The default value is set to 40 6. this criterion will then look at the angle of equilibrium of the vessel under the applied wind heeling arm. The criterion is evaluated after an equilibrium analysis.7). but note the different wind speeds to be used.6: Wind stiffness test Determine the wind heeling moment as defined in 6.2.5: Knockdown-recovery test The test can be approximated by examining the angle of vanishing stability in the flooded condition.2.3: Offset-load test This criterion is most effectively evaluated by performing an equilibrium analysis with the required offset loading condition Sailing Boats: 7. 6.2.Appendix B Determine the parameters required for calculation of the wind heeling moment as per 6.2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figure 2 (Section 6.2) Part 2: Sailing boats of hull length greater than or equal to 6m 6. Convert this to a heeling lever.2. the default value is set at 1.42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length.3: Downflooding angle Must be greater than a certain value as determined according to the design category. it should self right.2: Downflooding-height tests Determine the required downflooding height and specify the appropriate loading condition.6.6. The default value is 130. see Table 5 (Section 6.6.2) and entered into the required value field. 6. Non-Sailing Boats: 6.4.6 for the wind speed of interest (Table 6.42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length. Part 3: Boats of hull length less than 6m These criteria are evaluated after an equilibrium analysis under the specified loading condition.6.2. If the flooded vessel has positive GZ at the knockdown angle.3. Calculate the GZ curve with the crew seated to windward.3: Angle of vanishing stability Determine the required angle of vanishing stability which depends on design category and vessel displacement.2. Determine the limiting heel angle from Table 4 (Sections 6. Section 6. 7. 6. 6.3).5: Knockdown-recovery test The test can be approximated by examining the angle of vanishing stability in the flooded condition. If desired you can specify the other values or let Hydromax calculate them for you. 7. Also specify the sail area and vertical position of the sail area centroid and enter these values in the appropriate fields in the criterion.9). the default value is set at 1. it should self right.2) and entered into the required value field. see Tables 3 (Sections 6.4: Stability index (STIX) Determine the required STIX value depending on the design category. 6.2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figure 2 (Section 6. If the flooded vessel has positive GZ at the knockdown angle.6: Wind stiffness test Page 305 .

6 for the wind speed of interest (Table 6. this criterion will then look at the angle of equilibrium of the vessel under the applied wind heeling arm. Section 6. Calculate the GZ curve with the crew seated to windward.7).6.Appendix F Determine the wind heeling moment as defined in 6. Page 306 .6. Convert this to a heeling lever.

hcr Description The library is not related to the Hydromax Design File. precision.hml . this can be done by going to the appropriate window and saving it to a separate file. File Maxsurf Design Extension .Maxsurf surface information .g. Page 307 . However.rtf Library Hydromax Criteria Library Extension .htk . flexibility.txt Description Result tables can be saved separately Results tables can not be opened in Hydromax The report can be saved separately Report . trimming. E.Links to or information on the Stability Criteria Library . outside arrows.msd Description Contains control point and surface information. not when the model is opened.Links to or information on the Results tables . For more information see the section on criteria.hmd file does not contain: .Appendix B Appendix E: Reference Tables This appendix contains the following reference tables: File Extension Reference Table Analysis settings reference table File Extension Reference Table The following table lists files that are used in Hydromax.dcs .txt Description Each loadcase can be saved separately The compartment definition can be saved separately The damage case definition can be saved separately All tables in the input window can be saved as text files. margin lines.msd file Hydromax looks for a .hmd file contains all the additional information that defines the Hydromax model and you need only save this file when working in Hydromax.Links to or information on the Report Hydromax Design . is not model related.hmd file with the same name. i. Contains hydrostatic sections information and all Input information that may also be stored separately in the files below The . The library is loaded when the program starts. sounding pipes and modulus Output files All Result Window tables Extension . thickness. if you wish to transfer loadcases or compartment definitions from one model to another. The .hmd Separate Input files Loadcase Compartments Damage cases All Input window tables Extension . Downflooding/embarkation points.e. colour When opening a .

the current VCG is used. Page 308 . result S R LC FTTLC FTT Cannot be specified – they are a calculated resul Specific (fixed. b) The GZ curve is calculated for the specified VCG and then the normalised KN curve is calculated as KN = GZ + VCG*SIN(heel). 3 The VCG is required for the floodable length analysis because of its effect on trim. the trim can be substantial and the vertical separation of CG and CB needs to be taken into account. 4 The TCG may be specified directly of derived from the lost cargo / ballast water in damaged tanks from the current loadcase. LC LC S / LC S1 result2 S3 n/a Where. a) The VCG only has an effect on the results if the analysis is free-to-trim. single) value to be set by user Varied within Range specified by user Calculates values from loadcase – specifies displacement and COG only Free-to-trim to loadcase CG Free-to-trim to LCG calculated from a specific initial trim angle or specified LCG (and VCG) 1 The VCG is used in two ways in the KN analysis. 2 The VCG is not required for the Limiting KG analysis. When calculating the LCG from a specified trim and displacement. During the floodable length analysis.Appendix F Analysis settings reference table The following table can be used as a reference to the various analysis settings for each analyses type. Analysis Settings Analyses type Trim Heel Draft DisplaceLCG TCG VCG ment Upright stability Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Specified Condition KN values Limiting KG Floodable Length Tank Calibration S S/ FTTLC result S S / FTT S / FTT FTT S Upright R result S R R Upright Upright R result result S result result result n/a result LC LC S / LC R R R n/a n/a LC LC S / LC S/ FTT S/ FTT FTT n/a n/a LC LC S / LC S/ LC4 S/ LC4 n/a n/a For GM etc.

Structured Programming The best defence against bugs in software is to use structured programming techniques that have been proven to improve software reliability.000 lines of code and we believe our history of reliability reflects the effort we have put into using reliable coding practices. verification of the underlying algorithms.Appendix B Appendix F: Quality Assurance This appendix describes the quality assurance processes used to ensure Hydromax gives reliable and accurate results. Verification of Algorithms When new design or analysis algorithms are introduced into Hydromax. we follow a series of engineering and testing principles and procedures to ensure that Hydromax will produce results which are consistent with the level of accuracy and thoroughness a professional engineer applies to design work. see Reference Calculations. This following explains how Formation Design Systems has verified that Hydromax gives accurate results and what steps we take to make sure that each version of the software we ship is as reliable as possible. Hydromax is a complex software system of over 400. we summarize by saying that we utilize structured code. Page 309 . Without going into the technical details of our software development methodology. data hiding and encapsulation and fault tolerant programming practices to enhance our software's reliability. testing of the computer implementation of those algorithms. testing of real world problems inhouse and beta testing in the field at Hydromax user sites. These designs are of simple geometric shapes and can be used to validate calculations performed by Hydromax. Below is a table of results derived analytically from these shapes compared with results obtained from Maxsurf and Hydromax at different precisions. object oriented design. Quality Principles While it is impossible to ensure that any software product is completely free of bugs. Quality Assurance Many Hydromax users ask us how we know that Hydromax produces the correct results. Reference Designs A folder of reference hull shapes is included with Maxsurf and Hydromax. we first carry out testing on the algorithms on Reference Designs – these are proven test cases with known analytical solutions. To this end we follow a development and testing path which includes use of structured programming techniques.

39% -1.34279 261.79% % error -0.23% -0.564741 490.105 WP Area m^2 78.333 833.673 Hydromax High Precision Hydromax Low Precision 391.57% % error -0.991 Maxsurf Hi Precision 392. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I Long.01% -0.333 % error -0.191 490.00% 0.04% -2.79939 261.333333 833.534 78.761 480.01% -0.00% 0.874 -1.875 -1.00% 0.522 Maxsurf Low Precision 389.05% -0.121 -2.122 -2.333333 833.33333 833.01% 0.6807269 488.00% 0.871 LCB m 0 0 0 0 0 Trans.874 WP Area m^2 100 100 100 100 100 VCB m -2. I m^4 Long. I Long.03% Analytically derived Hydromax High Precision Hydromax Low Precision Maxsurf Hi Precision Maxsurf Low Precision 10m Cylinder 10m diam.88% % error -0.33333 833.764 260.87385 489.875 -1.56% -0.53982 78.875 -1.333 833.00% 0.308 833.06% -1.10% -1.118 LCB m 0 0 0 0 0 Trans.357 78.257 833.00% Page 310 .532 257.849 VCB m -1.333 833.93873 485. comparison of Maxsurf and Hydromax with analytical values sphere 10m diam at 5m draft Volume m^3 261.00% 0.89 % error -0.14247 488.25% -0.01% -0.Appendix F Reference Calculations Hydrostatics calculations for various reference designs.00% % error 0.699 392.00% % error 0.121 -2. I m^4 Long.72% % error 0.18% -0.01% -0. I 833. I 490.122 -2.57 483. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans.47% -0.873852 488. at 5m draft Volume m^3 Analytically derived 392.341 77.00% 0.02% -0.00% 0.

63 167.942 -0.13% -0.39% % error -0.9375 Volume WP Area VCB m^3 m^2 m Analytically derived 9. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans.00% 0. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans.91 168.01% -0.98 -0.667 1666.78% % error -0.998 -0.00% % error 0.01% -0.67% Page 311 .09% -0.5 LCB m 0 0 0 0 0 Trans. I 1666.372 14.6667 6666.5 -2.97% % error -0.92418 1.6667 6666.5m.00% 0.368 Hydromax High Precision 14.01% -0.26% -0.621 % error -0.666666 1666.07% -0.B=1.92875 1.667 6666.352 9.6667 6666.5 -2. I m^4 Long.666666 1666.00% % error 0.351 14.07% -0.351 Maxsurf Low Precision 9.00% 0.666666 1666.00% % error 0.5 -2.04% -0.352 Maxsurf Hi Precision 9.5 -2.00% 0.00% 0.352 Hydromax Low Precision 9.00% Parabolic Wigley type Hull.92527 1.00% 0.667 6666.00% 0.351 LCB m 0 0 0 0 0 Trans. LWL=15m. I Long.927 1.00% 0.03% -0. I 1.999 -0. I Long.75 168.302 14.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.Box 20m long 10m beam at 5m draft Volume m^3 Analytically derived 1000 Hydromax High Precision 1000 Hydromax Low Precision 1000 Maxsurf Hi Precision 1000 Maxsurf Low Precision 1000 WP Area m^2 200 200 200 200 200 VCB m -2.3773 168.4685 168.375 15 -0.24% -0.667 % error 0.D=0.00% 0. I m^4 Long.22% -0.

A development version is usually only for internal use and is a very early demonstration of a possible new product or feature. Testing of Upgrades As each new version of Hydromax is released we perform a series of tests to ensure it functions correctly. please contact our technical support staff by email at support@formsys. and send you a new corrected version of the program.0 1. it is necessary for you to model the problem correctly and to correctly interpret the results produced. testing is then carried out on more complex sample problems to which a solution has already been established using a proven analysis program. An alpha release is a first public release of a program for initial testing and comment. If you suspect a problem with Hydromax. To get accurate results from Hydromax. Once the beta test program is completed and all testers are happy with the program. It is highly experimental and not reliable. At each release the results from these tests are compared with the results from the previous release to ensure conformance with answers which have been established as being correct. debugged program reliable and ready for professional use.6 1. For example 1. we begin shipping the commercial version.5 1. Version Control Each new version of Hydromax displays a version number indicating the version and the date the software was first shipped. However. the version number may also include a letter and number suffix indicating the type and number of the release.0d1 The first development release of version 1. It is the users' responsibility to correctly model the structure and assume responsibility for the results.6b2 The second beta test release of version 1. In the unlikely event of a problem being found. This involves sending the software to practicing engineers and having them use it on design work in progress to determine its reliability for actual design use. it is possible for errors to occur. we conduct a beta test of the software. These beta testers provide us with feedback on the reliability and accuracy of the program as well as its useability and suitability for everyday work.64 A commercial release of version 1. A commercial release is a completed. alpha test or beta test release. Beta Testing Immediately prior to the release of each new version of Hydromax.64 But we're not Perfect We make every effort to ensure that our software will meet our users' needs and perform accurately. Page 312 . If the version is a development. we will correct it as soon as practicable.5a2 The second alpha test release of version 1. It is mostly reliable but may contain some bugs. as with all complex software systems.Appendix C Testing of Implementation Once the basic algorithms have been proven correct. AutoShip etc. These results may either come from Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering texts such as well as from other results carried out by Formation Design Systems or other engineers using other software products such as NAPA. it is not reliable.com and explain what you believe the problem to be. A beta release is a final test version of the program released for field testing prior to commercial release.

......................... 200 D Damage .......... 62 Convergence Error ......................................... 150 Create cases from Zone Damage ........................................................................................................................ 103 KN Values Analysis .................................................................................................................................. 42 Add Surface Areas ............. 212 Assembly View ......................................................................................................................................... 199 Save As .. 203 Compartment Definition . 204 Cell Border ...... 221 Boundary Box ........................................... 52 Forming ........... 200 Criteria............................................... 70 Linked . 96 Longitudinal Strength .......... 84 Curves of Form .............................. 202 Add Damage case .... 212 Case Menu ....... 79 Animate .................................................... 204 Creating a Compartment definition file ... 72 saving ..... 205 Criteria File Format............... 309 Toolbar ............................................Index Index A About Hydromax ...185........................................................................... 200 Copying Graphs .......... Prob Damage Import.................... 155 Damage Case Add.... 52 Bulkheads................................... 184 New ....... 70 Tanks................................ add........................................................................................................................ 106 Specified Conditions ............................................................. 91 Tank Calibrations ............. 70 Non-Buoyant Volumes ................................................................... 72 Delete ..................... 52 Creating a new Loadcase File ............ 70 Compartments.............................. 69 Compartments ......................................................................................... 204 Output .. 84 Cut.................................................................................................................................................................... 77 Analysis Menu ........ 204 Add Load .............................. 200 Reset to defaults ........................................................ delete ..................... 72 Display ......72....................................................................... 216 Coefficients.................................................. 181 Check for Updates............................. 183 Data Format ..................................... 185 C Calibration Increment .................... 90 Analysis type Equilibrium ............................................................................................................................. 39 Criteria ..................... 71 Cascade ............... 73 Extent of damage .................................................................... 210 Batch Analysis ............................................................... Main Import........................................................................................................................................ 159 Corrected VCG ............................................... 82 Limiting KG ................... 195 Analysis in waves ......................... 207 Page 313 ............... 73 Damage Window ..................... 181 Centre of flotation ........................................................................................................................... 161 Select....... 172 Criteria........................................ 313 Block Coefficient ............................................... 156 Settings.......................... 202 Allowable shears and moments .................................................... 201 Cell Shading ...... 139 Beam ............... 200 Save As .................................................... 181 Centre of gravity .................... 108 Upright Hydrostatics ............................................................................... 211 Hydrostatic ..................................................................................................................................................................... calculation of.................................................................... 181 Automation Reference ................... 70 Linked Tanks ......... 201 Centre of buoyancy .......................... 147 Coordinate system............... 174 Criteria Libraries .......................................................................................... 161 Compartment types . 36 Colour ......... 213 B Background .................. 93 Large Angle Stability ........... 211 Arrange Icons ............................ 218 Beta Testing ................................................. 200 Curve of Areas ......... 52 Saving ...............................158..................................................... 74 Rename .......................................... 213 Closing a Loadcase ...........................................51....................................................... 213 Activate GHS Export ....................... 191 Copying Tables ....................... 88 Floodable Length .............................. 78..... 42 Coefficient parameters ..... 34 Copy ........

..... coherence ... 198 Dynamic Stability .................................... 189 Data interpolation................................. 188 Graphs .......... 75.. 214 Frame of Reference ............... 240 Help Menu ....................................................... 9 Export................. 146....................................................................................... 73 Fluid analysis method .............................. 76 Draft ............................................................................................................. 196 Edit Damage case...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 196 Design Preparation ............. 212 Curve of Areas ................................. 35 DWL . 204 Edit Loadcase ............................... 201 Delete Damage case ...... 197 Exit ............................ 204 External Tanks ................................ 205 Flooding ................................. 199 Free Surface Moment .................................................................80........ 190 get data .................................................................... 189 Curves of Form ............................. 202 Horizontal lever ....... 89 Full Screen ................................................. 8 H Heel ...................... 18 Design..................... 201 Move Items Down.................................................................................................................................................... 205 Font ............ 205 Display Background ............ 198 Graph ... 190 Righting Lever (GZ) ............................. 211 Deactivate GHS Export.............................................................. 210 Home View .... 87 Downflooding points ..................... 161 Extent of Damage .................................142..................... 145...... 202 Move Items Up ................................... 201 Floodable Length .................................. 189 Type ...................................................................................... Export....18................................................................... 204 Edit Menu ........................................... 198 Export Bitmap ..........51........................ 202 Delete Cells ..............................................0 file....................................................................................21...............51........................................................................................................................... 206 Hydromax v8. Export.......... 151... 194 Edit....... 204 G GHS... 200 Hydromax Version 8................................................................. 194 File.............. 211 Design Grid Toolbar ....................................................... 197 Save ................................................................. 150 Freeboard ... 308 File Menu .......................................................... 198 GHS............................................. 88 Equilibrium Condition ... 190 Graph Formatting ... 56 Extra Buttons Toolbar ................................................................................. 211 Fredyn ............ Add................... 210 Grounding ........................................... 201 Emergence Angles ........ 202 Sort Items ..................... 205................. 189 double click .......................... Import. 207 Downflooding Angles . 195.....................Index Data layout ................................. 18.. 190 Graph Printing to Scale ........................................................................ 219..... 80 DXF export .......................................... 203 Form parameters ........................... 83 E Edge Visibility Toolbar.......... 210 Density .................. 200 Edit Toolbar ............................ 87 Equilibrium .181....... 197 Save As ................................................................. 212 Hide DXF.. 9................................ 210 Display Menu ................. 199 Exporting ................. 198 ....................... 43 Hull Sections Recalculate ................ 189 Graph colours ........................ 149 Fluid VCG..... 201 Delete ............... 159 Graph Window ..................................................................................................................... 197 Open ................................. 189 Grid ...................................... 151 Fluids ....................154....... 206 GZ ......... 204 Delete DXF background ..... 220 Draft marks ............................................................................................................................................. 205 Heeling Moments ................................................................................... 197 File Toolbar............................................................................0 .............................................................. Export ...................... 160 Displacement.. 12 Floodable Length Criteria dialog .................................................................. 205 Design Grid ............... 185 Linking to tanks or compartments ............................................................................ 35.................................................... 196 F File Extension Table ................................................... 20 Saving .................................................................................... 197 Fill Down ......... 186 Data Menu...................................... 162 DXF................. 162 New ............. Page 314 Close .................................

..................................... 201 Midship Section ........ 185 adding........ 43 Loadcase Template ......... 76 Results .......................... Workshop structure ........ Distributed Loads ......................... 77 Moment to trim ........................................23............................... 44 Loadcase........ 202 Paste ............................................... 84 lateral projected area .............. 87 deleting......................... 43 Grouping tanks ................ 221 Prob damage zones .......... Export ................................................. saving ............ 198 Individual Loadcase ........................ 34 Input ...................................... 96 Linked negative compartments ....................................16......................................................... 14 MARPOL oil outflow ..................................... 51 nuShallo.................. 205 Perspective view ....... 22 Preferences ...................................................... 201 Insert Row ...................... 186 KN Values........................................................................................ 197 Import DXF Background ............ 45 Loadcase................................................... 93 L Large Angle Stability ............ 161 Input Window .............................................................. max... 222 Length ........................... 42 Free surface correction ......................... 77 Measurement reference frames ............................ 44 Headings lines ........ 46 Loadgroup ........ Tank loads .................................................................................................... 75............................................................ 44 Loadcase Sorting.......... 113 Max.............................................................................................. 200 Print Preview....... 201 Permeability .... 206 MARPOL . 217 Libraries .................................... 198 Import Image Background ..... 116 MSC............. cross referencing ............ 220 Modulus points ....... 51 maximum number . 75 Data .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 159 Printing to scale ......................................................38..... 8............. 209 Page 315 .... Area Section ....................... 223 Immersion Angles ...............................................................................12A..... 42 Renaming .............................. 197 MEPC... 172 Limiting KG ...................................................... formatting........... 113 MEPC................13................................................ 161 Update ........................................... 47 Loadcase Colour Formatting............141(54) Reg..... 16 ISO 12217-1 ............................................ 212 Adding and Deleting loads....... 58 Loadcase ...................117(52) Reg.. 159 Prismatic Coefficient ................................................................. 210 Initial Conditions .... 113 Merge Cells ..................................................................................... 11....... 182 Precision..................... 184 Insert New Table ..................... 185 Modulus Window ............ 183 Loadcase... 82........................................................ 10................................................. 204 Loadcase..................... 47 Loadcase................................. 212 Input Tables........ 44 Loadcase Formatting.... Import ............................................................................. 35............ 200 Pan ...... 303 K Key points ......................................... 116 N Non-Buoyant Volume Definition ........... 41 saving ..................... 40 Loadcase Window................ 51 Loading a Saved Loadcase.............................. surface .......................... column selection ................ 201 Installing Hydromax .................................................................19(58) ............................. 198 Immersed depth......................... 159 Printing............. 58.... 49 Loadcase............. 47 Loadgroup......................................... 20 overlap .......................................................................................................................... 240 LCB....... 87 Import....................................................Index I IGES.......................................................... 43 Blank lines ................................181......... 146..................................................................................................................... 220 Immersion ............... 45 Editing loads ............................................................ 185 Margin Line.................................................... 198 O Online Support ..................................................... 202 Print..................................... 223 MSC............ 214 Menus...................... 38..... 41 Longitudinal Strength .......77..................... 76 editing ....................... 220 Maximum deck inclination ........................................................... 223 Maximum shears and moments ........ 213 Outside arrows ..216(82) ..... 59 P Page Setup............... 42 Distributed loads ........... LCG ........ 43 Totals .................... 106 M Margin Line points...........................13.......... Snap to hull .................... number ........................ density ....

........................ 70 Specific Gravity ...................................... 138.... 191 Keystrokes...........................10...............................70.................................... 91... 184 Calibration Increment .general heeling arm .. check boxes ... 203 Property Sheet ............................... 294 Stability criteria.. 210 Show Grid ............. 116 Probabilistic Damage – Saving input parameters .............................................. 212 Results Window .................... Angle of equilibrium multiple heeling arms ..................................................................60..... 288 Stability criteria............................................................ 193 Reporting ..........................passenger crowding ................ 292 Stability criteria................................ 161 Saving Densities...................................................................... Angle of vanishing stability .. 185 Results................ Angle of maximum GZ . 311 Reference Designs ....... 181 Q Quality Assurance .................................................. 171 Stability criteria................... 209 Set Analysis Type .......................GZ derived wind heeling arm............................................................................. 136 Probabilistic Damage – Inputs .. 156 Results .................... 31 Sections..... 250 Stability criteria........... 250 Stability criteria.......... 84 Save ....................... 30 Shrink ....................... Angle of downflooding ..............general wind heeling arm 283 ... Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm ...................... 150 Stability criteria.... Angle of equilibrium .................................... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ................................................................ 16 Show DXF ..................... 152 Section Area Coefficient ....... 202 Row Positioning ... 248 Stability criteria...... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ........................ Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) ............. Angle of equilibrium .... 15............. 293 Stability criteria........................ Angle of deck edge immersion . Angle of equilibrium general heeling arm ....................................................................... 201 Spool to Report .... 146 Split Cell ......269.........general cos+sin heeling arm ...... 151 Specified Condition ... capsizing moment.............................................. Angle of equilibrium passenger crowding heeling arm ..... 161 Resume Analysis........................... 224 Rotate .................................. 116 Probabilistic Damage – Analysis . 289 Reference Calculations ............ 293 Stability criteria.......................... Forming . 310 Relative Density ..................................... 196 Report Window .... 119 Probabilistic Damage – log file......Index Probabilistic Damage ........................... 270 Stability criteria.......................................................................... 248 Stability criteria.... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ...... 181....................... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ................ 19 Page 316 Sounding Pipes ..... 249 Stability criteria. 240 Stability criteria............ 277 Stability criteria....................... Angle of margin line immersion .... 211 Report Toolbar .............................. 249 Stability criteria... 296 Stability criteria... saving ........... 27 Select All................................... 160........... angle calculators ...................................................... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ......... 151 Render .................................. 268 Stability criteria.....highspeed turn heeling arm ..... dialog ...................................................................................... 211 Render Transparent ................................................... 60..................................... 221 Section......... 206 Righting Moment ...................................... 210 Sectional Area Curve .................................. 187 Stability criteria... 119 Properties .............. 282 Stability criteria.... 294 Stability criteria..... 206 Set Home View ...........lifting weight ................ 209 Shift Key ....................... Angle of equilibrium .................... Areas and levers .............. show single............. 117 Probabilistic Damage – Principles ........................................................................................................... 151 Skin Thickness ................................................................ 202 Simulate fluid movement .......................... 270 Stability criteria.......................................................... Angle of vanishing stability general heeling arm .. 310 Quality Principles.............. 201 S Safe steady heeling angles ....................towing.......................... 228 Stability criteria............................................ 207 Stability booklet ............. 205 Specified Conditions.. 201 Show single hull section ....................................... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ............... 293 Stability criteria................................................................. 310 R Ratio of equilibrium angles – GZ area derived heeling arm...high-speed turn ........................................................... 201 Select View from Data .............. 71 Edit .............. 78 Stability Criteria Results .............................................. 293 Stability criteria. 202 Set Vessel to DWL...

........................ Heeling due to passenger crowding ...... 244 Stability criteria....................... 235 Stability criteria..........................749(18) ..................... 261 Stability criteria....... 273 Stability criteria......................... Ratio of GMT and heeling arm ................ General heeling arm ............... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) ........................... pitch or slope at equilibrium ... 271 Stability criteria............. minimum GM calculator – Wind pressure .......... non-healing arm ................ Heeling due to lifting of weights .. Ratio of areas type 1 general cos+sin heeling arm..................... heeling arm units .... GZ area between limits type 2 ............................ 239 Stability criteria. General cos+sin heeling arm .......172.................................... ISO 12217 ..... 305 Stability criteria.231... 268 Stability criteria.............. Heeling due to grain shift 239 Stability criteria................................... list ....................... 237 Stability criteria................. 293 Stability criteria....... 172 Stability criteria........ Other criteria ................... IMO Code on Intact Stability A................. 178 Stability criteria... 232 Stability criteria........... moving criteria ..................................................... 278 Stability criteria.......... GZ area between limits type 2......... 170 Stability criteria.36(63 ..... 274 Stability criteria....HSC monohull type ....... minimum GM calculator – Constant ........... IMO HSC Code MSC......... 291 Stability criteria............................... 173 Stability criteria...................... Heeling due to arbitrary forces .... 238 Stability criteria................ 266 Stability criteria..... 243 Stability criteria............. Maximum Freeboard at equilibrium ... 287 Stability criteria..... 251 Stability criteria............... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2a) ............... 242 Stability criteria.................. 163 Stability criteria...... 229 Stability criteria...... 235 Stability criteria. 170 Stability criteria.... 270 Stability criteria................................ importing .......................... minimum GM calculator – Grain ..... 272 Stability criteria.......... 264 Stability criteria.................. Maximum value of heel.................. Heeling due to towing ....... 285 Stability criteria....................... Minimum Freeboard at equilibrium ........... Heeling due to wind ...... GZ curve features ......... Heeling due to turning....................231............ 262 Stability criteria........................... Ratio of areas type 3 general heeling arm ....... GZ definitions ..... minimum GM calculator – Constant with freeboard .......................... 278 Stability criteria. 238 Stability criteria.general heeling arm .................. 242 Stability criteria... GZ area between limits type 1 ................ pass/fail test ........................ IMO roll back angle calculator . 172 Stability criteria........... Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2.. Ratio of GZ area between limits ................... GZ area derived heeling arm type 2......... GZ area between limits type 1 ....................................... 288 Stability criteria............. 229 Stability criteria......... 240 Stability criteria....multiple heeling arms ....... equilibrium ......general heeling arm ...... 170 Stability criteria.................. heeling arm dependency on displacement .................... GZ................. Maximum ratio of GZ to heeling arm .....165........... 286 Stability criteria........... criteria library file ..................................... 250 Stability criteria............ defining custom criteria...... Range of positive stability ......... glossary .... GZ area between limits type 2 .... GZ area between limits type 3 .. 234 Stability criteria.. Heeling due to bollard-pull ...... 179 Stability criteria........ Range of positive stability general heeling arm ...... GZ area between limits type 1 .......................... Gust ratio ............ Ratio of areas type 1 general heeling arm ..........Index Stability criteria... 263 Stability criteria. 176 Stability criteria.......... 255 Stability criteria.. 262 Stability criteria. GM calculators .................... 243 Stability criteria........... 172 Stability criteria... 253 Stability criteria.......... 275 Stability criteria.......... Ratio of areas type 1 multiple heeling arms ..... GZ derived heeling arm ............. 300 Stability criteria.................wind heeling arm ........................................ Minimum ratio of GZ to heeling arm ................... 236 Stability criteria.......... GZ area derived heeling arm type 1.....230.... 298 Stability criteria.............................................................. 233 Stability criteria..standard.................... parent criteria ................ 298 Stability criteria..............HSC multihull type ....... 242 Stability criteria........................................... Ratio of areas type 2 general heeling arm ... copying criteria..................general heeling arm .................................. heeling arm definition ................................multiple heeling arms ...................... 233 Stability criteria.. 294 Stability criteria........STIX ..... Heeling due to trawling .. 247 Page 317 .. 250 Stability criteria. 279 Stability criteria....................... 239 Stability criteria.................................. damage and intact settings .....................229.

................. 53 tanks overlap ........................ boundary surfaces ................................................................ deleting ...................................37. tree list ....................................................................... 265 Stability criteria................................................ 194 View Window .................................... 205 sinusoidal ....................... 260 Stability criteria............................................................................................... 205 Fixed ........................................................................... 19 T Table .......... 222 Wave definition............. 264 Stability criteria.............. 153 trochoidal .............................................. Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm ...................................... 153 Wave height ............. 161 Surface Thickness .............. 200 Units .. KN ........................ 302 Stability criteria..... 52 tapered............................... 206 Start Batch Analysis......................................................... User Defined Heeling Arm ........................................... Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits ................................................................................................................................................................................general heeling arm... 245 Stability criteria........................................................ 153 ... 196 View Direction ........................................ 246 Start Analysis ........... 212 Tolerances ................. 60 Saving .......................................................... 244 Stability criteria.... 79 V Validate Hydromax model .............................................................................................194........ 212 View Menu .................................. 156 Surface Use ..... 58........ 207 Starting Hydromax ............................... 223 Trimmed surfaces............ 280 Stability criteria...... 20 U Undo.... 176 Stability criteria............. Value of RM at specified angle or maximum RM below specified angle ............................... checking ...............multiple heeling arms..................................... 173 Stability criteria................................ 147 Toolbars ....... 170 Stability criteria...... 54 Non-Buoyant Areas ................ 244 Stability criteria........ Value of GMt at equilibrium ............ 144 Free-to-trim to a specified LCG value ............................. 56 linked ............................... Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 .............................................................................................. 174 Stability criteria............................................ 154 Waveform . 201 Tank adding...................... 207 Streaming results to Word ................................7.................................... 257 Stability criteria........................................ 196 W Waterplane Area Coefficient .....13.............. 169 Stability criteria........... Value of GZ at ..general heeling arm ..................... 276 Stability criteria.......................................................... USL code.......195...................... 138........ 234 Stability criteria. selecting for analysis ...... 206 Upright Hydrostatics ................ results .................. Limiting KG..... 211 Update Loadcase ............................... Value of GMt at .... 27 Trim ................................................................ Subdivision Index s-factor MSC 19(58 .............. 61 Page 318 Tank Calibrations ........ Value of GZ at equilibrium general heeling arm ............................... saving ................... 59 Tanks Recalculate ................................................... Survivability Index MSC_216(82) ...................... 58 Tanks. report and batch processing ........................ 54 complex ........................ 195 TCG....... 203 Stop Analysis ............. 264 Stability criteria...................... 206 Tanks within Compartments ......... 203 Trapezoidal integration ................................................................................................................................ Value of maximum GZ ... 145 Free-to-trim using a specified initial trim value ...................... Value of GZ at specified angle or maximum GZ below specified angle .................... 54 simple ........................................... 61 Visibility ........................... 56 Recalculate .......... 243 Stability criteria....... 145 View (extended)Toolbar ....................................................................................Index Stability criteria........... 145 Tile Horizontal ..................... Value of GMt or GMl at equilibrium ........................................ 145 Trim angle ........... 181 Visibility . 30 VCG for trim balance...... 16 Status Bar .................... 209 Visibility Toolbar ................................................. 52 Fluids .................143............................................ Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 ...................... 268 Stability criteria... 61 Permeability .............................. 108 Tank Type external..................... 244 Stability criteria.... 202 View Toolbar ......... 60 Ordering ........................ 212 Tile Vertical ........................................ 138......................................

................ 202 Page 319 ...... 154 Wetted surface area.......... 212 Window Toolbar ..... 195 Windows Registry......................................... integration of ......................................................... 181...... 156 Word.................... 43 Zoom ......Index Wavelength .............. report streaming to ............................................................... report templates................. 35....................................................... 157 Z Zero Point .......... 224 Window Menu . 16 Word......... 18.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful